2022 - SQ300i_Hybrid1P_C

Prévia do material em texto

SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase 
Automatic Voltage Control 
 
Installation and Operation Manual 
SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
 
 
Contents 
 
Important Safety Notice ................................................................................................................... 5 
Description of Symbols ................................................................................................................ 5 
For Your Safety… ........................................................................................................................ 6 
Critical Installation Notes ................................................................................................................. 9 
Principles Of Operation ................................................................................................................. 11 
Overview .................................................................................................................................... 11 
Spark Detection ...................................................................................................................... 11 
SQ-300i Operations with CLR Control ................................................................................... 12 
Description Of Features ................................................................................................................. 13 
Overview .................................................................................................................................... 13 
Control System Design .............................................................................................................. 13 
Control Connections .................................................................................................................. 16 
SQ-300i Hybrid Controller Connections ................................................................................. 16 
Transient Filter Board Connections ........................................................................................ 18 
SQControl Software ................................................................................................................... 19 
Associated Software .................................................................................................................. 20 
System Configuration (Examples) ............................................................................................. 20 
Installing the SQControl Software ................................................................................................. 24 
Recommended System Specifications (for Laptop or PC) ........................................................ 24 
Installing SQControl on a Laptop or PC ..................................................................................... 24 
Installing SQControl on the Operator Interface .......................................................................... 26 
Start the SQControl Software .................................................................................................... 28 
Installing the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller ........................................................................................ 29 
Overview .................................................................................................................................... 29 
Installation Requirements .......................................................................................................... 29 
Location Requirements .......................................................................................................... 29 
Power and Environmental Requirements ............................................................................... 30 
Installing the SQ-300i Hybrid Components ................................................................................ 30 
Mounting the Components ..................................................................................................... 30 
Configuring the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and Operator Interface ........................................... 30 
Setting the Date, Time and Time Zone .................................................................................. 31 
Non-Network-Type Configuration ........................................................................................... 31 
Network-Type Configuration................................................................................................... 32 
Language Selection ................................................................................................................ 33 
Navigating the SQ-300i ................................................................................................................. 35 
Overview .................................................................................................................................... 35 
The Operate Screens ................................................................................................................. 35 
Functions Screens ..................................................................................................................... 37 
SQ-300i Options Screen ........................................................................................................ 37 
System Settings Screen ......................................................................................................... 39 
Portrait Mode.............................................................................................................................. 40 
Security ...................................................................................................................................... 44 
Programming The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase Controller ......................................................... 45 
Overview .................................................................................................................................... 45 
Transformer/Rectifier Set Sizing ................................................................................................ 47 
Scaling Settings ......................................................................................................................... 51 
Operating Limits ......................................................................................................................... 54 
Alarm Limits ............................................................................................................................... 58 
Spark Response ........................................................................................................................ 62 
Back Corona Settings ................................................................................................................ 67 
Pulse Blocking Settings ............................................................................................................. 71 
Rapper Outputs (Optional) ......................................................................................................... 73 
Communication Settings ............................................................................................................ 78 
Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................................... 81 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
3
Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................. 83 
Analog Outputs .......................................................................................................................... 85 
Analog Inputs .............................................................................................................................87 
Heater/Horn Settings (Optional)................................................................................................. 89 
Aux Contact Output .................................................................................................................... 92 
Reduced-Power Rapping ........................................................................................................... 94 
Operating the Hybrid Single-Phase Controller .............................................................................. 95 
Overview .................................................................................................................................... 95 
Operate Screen Displays ........................................................................................................... 95 
Status And Alarm Messages.................................................................................................... 108 
Table View ............................................................................................................................... 111 
SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase Functions ..................................................................................... 113 
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 113 
Trending ................................................................................................................................... 114 
Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 117 
Sample Waveforms .............................................................................................................. 120 
VI Curves ................................................................................................................................. 123 
Energy Management ................................................................................................................ 125 
System Functions ........................................................................................................................ 126 
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 126 
Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 126 
Manage Controls ...................................................................................................................... 128 
Manage OPC I/O ..................................................................................................................... 132 
Event Log ................................................................................................................................. 135 
Communications .......................................................................................................................... 136 
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 136 
Communications Networks ...................................................................................................... 136 
Recommended Network Communication Parts ................................................................... 136 
Remote Diagnostics And Real Time Monitoring ...................................................................... 137 
Memory Map ............................................................................................................................ 138 
The Optional Operator Interface .................................................................................................. 160 
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 160 
SQ-300i Operator Interface Features ...................................................................................... 160 
Installing the SQ-300i Operator Interface ................................................................................ 160 
Operator Interface Installation Requirements ...................................................................... 161 
Parts/Tools Required for Installation .................................................................................... 162 
Mounting Procedure (New installation) ................................................................................ 162 
Mounting Procedure (Replacement for 8700700-001B) ...................................................... 164 
Connection Procedure .......................................................................................................... 165 
Configuration Procedure ...................................................................................................... 165 
The Optional Auxiliary Display ..................................................................................................... 166 
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 166 
Installing the Auxiliary Display ................................................................................................. 166 
Location Requirements ........................................................................................................ 166 
Communication Requirements ............................................................................................. 166 
Power and Environmental Requirements ............................................................................. 166 
Parts Required ..................................................................................................................... 167 
Installation Diagram .............................................................................................................. 167 
Mounting Procedure ............................................................................................................. 169 
Connection Procedure .......................................................................................................... 171 
Configuration Procedure ...................................................................................................... 171 
Operating the SQ-300i Hybrid Auxiliary Display ...................................................................... 172 
The Main Screen .................................................................................................................. 172 
The Security and Languages Screen ................................................................................... 174 
The Language Screen .......................................................................................................... 175 
The Login Screen ................................................................................................................. 176 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
4
The Password Screen .......................................................................................................... 178 
Auxiliary Display Status and Alarm Messages ..................................................................... 179 
SQDiscover Software .................................................................................................................. 180 
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 180 
About the Search and Identification Process ....................................................................... 180 
About the Change Options ...................................................................................................180 
Important Notes .................................................................................................................... 181 
Configuring and Starting SQDiscover ...................................................................................... 182 
Operating SQDiscover ............................................................................................................. 187 
SQControl OPC Server ............................................................................................................... 190 
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 190 
Critical System Notes ............................................................................................................... 190 
About SQControl OPC Server Setup… ................................................................................ 190 
About OPC Client Setup… ................................................................................................... 191 
Before Starting the SQControl OPC Server… ..................................................................... 191 
Working with SQControl OPC Server ...................................................................................... 192 
SQControl OPC Server as a Service ................................................................................... 192 
SQControl Tags .................................................................................................................... 193 
Working with the B&W OPC Browser ...................................................................................... 198 
Working with Your OPC Client ................................................................................................. 201 
SQProgram Software .................................................................................................................. 202 
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 202 
Working with SQProgram ........................................................................................................ 202 
Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 206 
Appendices .................................................................................................................................. 208 
Notes & Acknowledgements .................................................................................................... 208 
Product Recognition and Declaration of Conformity ................................................................ 208 
Default Settings ........................................................................................................................ 210 
Using the Reset Feature .......................................................................................................... 212 
Reset Using SQDiscover...................................................................................................... 212 
Reset Using the Reset Button .............................................................................................. 212 
Service ..................................................................................................................................... 214 
Quick Tips ................................................................................................................................ 215 
Repairs ..................................................................................................................................... 219 
License Conditions ................................................................................................................... 220 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
5
Important Safety Notice 
Instruct all persons working on the products described in this booklet to read the entire booklet 
before installing, operating, or maintaining those products. 
 
 
Description of Symbols 
We may use symbols throughout this manual to alert you to important warnings and helpful 
information. When you see these symbols, please be sure to read the associated messages. 
 
 This symbol is used to warn you about the risk of electric shock and dangerous 
voltage. 
Ce symbole est utilisé pour vous alerter sur le risque de choc électrique et de 
tension dangereuse. 
Este símbolo alerta a Ud. del riesgo de un choque eléctrico y voltaje peligroso. 
 
This symbol is used to bring your attention to situations that may cause harm to 
people or equipment. 
Ce symbole est utilisé pour attirer votre attention sur les situations qui peuvent 
nuire aux personnes ou aux équipements. 
Este símbolo indica que debe prestar atención a situaciones que pueden causar 
daño a las personas o al equipo. 
� 
This symbol is used to alert you to helpful notes and information. 
Ce symbole est utilisé pour signaler des informations et des notes utiles. 
Este símbolo se utiliza para que preste atención a notas o información útiles. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
6
 
For Your Safety… 
 
 
 
• WARNING – RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. 
AVERTISSEMENT - RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION. 
ADVERTENCIA – RIESGO DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO. 
 
• CAUTION – Disconnect all power before servicing. 
ATTENTION – Coupez l'alimentation avant toute inter vention. 
PRECAUCIÓN – ANTES DE REALIZAR TAREAS DE MANTENIMIE NTO, 
DESCONECTE TODAS LAS FUENTES DE ENERGIA. 
 
• CAUTION – Disconnection of the protective earth con ductor may 
impair the protection provided by the system. 
ATTENTION – débranchement du conducteur de terre. C ela peut 
affecter la protection assurée par le système. 
PRECAUCIÓN – Al desconectar el conductor de tierra, es posible que 
el sistema deje de ofrecer protección. 
 
 
• Failure to follow B&W's Operation and Installation Manuals for all products 
described in this booklet voids all warranties and may result in malfunction of 
the product, property damage, serious personal injury or death. 
Pour tous les produits décrits dans ce livret, le non-respect des manuels 
d'installation et d'utilisation de B&W annule toutes les garanties et peut 
entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement du produit, des dommages matériels, 
des blessures graves ou mortelles. 
 
El hecho de no seguir las instrucciones de los manuales de instalación y 
operación de Babcock & Wilcox's (B&W) de todos los productos descritos en 
este manual, anulará cualquier garantía sobre dichos productos y podría 
generar el mal funcionamiento del producto, provocar daños materiales, 
lesiones personales graves e incluso la muerte. 
 
• When power is applied to the control system, several of the terminals on the 
SQ-300i Hybrid are energized. The ratings for each of these terminals are 
detailed in the Control Connections section. 
Lorsque le système de contrôle est alimenté, plusieurs bornes du SQ-300i 
Hybrid sont sous tension. Les caractéristiques électriques de chaque borne 
sont détaillées dans la section Raccordement des commandes. 
Cuando se energiza el sistema muchos terminales del SQ-300i Hybrid 
quedan energizados. Los niveles de voltaje de estos terminales se detallan 
en la sección Conexiones del Control. 
 
• To avoid serious personal injury or death, disconnect and lock out the power 
supply to any product described in this booklet before opening the access 
panel, working on or making electrical connections to the product. 
Pour éviter des blessures graves ou mortelles, débranchez et verrouillez 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
7
l'alimentationdes produits décrits dans ce livret avant toute ouverture du 
panneau d'accès, toute intervention ou tout raccordement des branchements 
électriques des appareils. 
Para evitar heridas graves e incluso la muerte, desconecte y bloquee la 
alimentación eléctrica de cualquier producto descrito en este manual antes 
de abrir el panel eléctrico, realizar conexiones eléctricas o trabajar en dichas 
conexiones. 
 
• If the control has the optional rapper outputs, DISABLE POWER TO THE 
SQ-300i if anyone is going into the precipitator. 
Si le système de contrôle dispose de sorties facultatives pour heurtoir, 
DÉSACTIVEZ L'ALIMENTATION DU SQ-300i si quelqu'un entre dans le 
dépoussiéreur. 
Si el control tiene salidas opcionales para el golpeo y personal va a ingresar 
al Electro-Filtro DESCONECTE primero LA ENERGIA DEL SQ-300i. 
 
� 
 
• Only qualified electricians or electrical instrument technicians should install 
or service all products described in this booklet. 
Seul un électricien qualifié ou des techniciens spécialisés dans les 
instruments électriques peuvent installer ou entretenir les appareils décrits 
dans ce livret. 
Los productos descritos en este manual deben ser instalados o recibir 
manteniemiento únicamente por electricistas o técnicos instrumentistas 
calificados. 
 
• Normal operation of the product described in this booklet does not require the 
operator to open the electronics control box for any reason. There are no 
serviceable parts on this device. 
Le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil décrit dans ce manuel ne nécessite 
jamais l'ouverture du boîtier de contrôle électronique par l'opérateur. Il 
n'existe aucune pièce réparable sur cet appareil. 
Para la operación normal del producto descrito en este manual no es 
necesario que el operador abra la caja que contiene los componentes 
electrónicos, puesto que este producto no posee ningún componente 
reparable. 
 
• If this component is to be installed inside or on any other system, equipment 
or product, follow all Operations Manuals for that system, product or 
equipment and your plant's safety rules and regulations when performing 
installation. 
Si ce composant doit être installé dans, ou sur, un autre système, 
équipement ou produit, respectez les instructions de tous les manuels 
d'utilisation de ce système, produit ou matériel ainsi que les règles et 
règlements de sécurité de votre établissement lorsque vous effectuez 
l'installation. 
En caso de que desee instalar el SQ-300i dentro de o en cualquier otro 
sistema, equipo o producto, siga todas las instrucciones de los manuales de 
uso para tal sistema, equipo o producto, así como también las reglas y 
normas de seguridad de su planta. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
8
• Be aware that in a precipitator, by design, all current flows through earth 
ground. 
Sachez que dans un dépoussiéreur, de par sa conception, le courant circule 
à travers le conducteur de terre. 
Recuerde que el diseño de los electro-filtros permite que toda la corriente 
fluya a través de la tierra. 
 
• There shall be no switches or disconnect devices in the earth conductor. 
Il ne doit y avoir aucun commutateur ou dispositif de déconnexion installé sur 
le conducteur de terre. 
En el conductor de tierra no debe haber ni interruptores ni dispositivos de 
desconexión. 
 
• The SQ-300i Hybrid is installed in a cabinet that provides power for the 
device. An approved disconnect device (breaker) with a minimum of 3.0 mm 
contact separation is provided on the cabinet, within reach of the operator. 
The rating of the disconnect device will vary and is based on the source 
voltage and current at the installation site. This disconnect device is required 
to provide over-current protection to the device. 
 
In rare cases, the disconnect will be located some distance away from the 
control cabinet. In these cases, it is the sites’ responsibility to ensure that the 
location of the disconnect is clearly posted/visible for the operator. 
Le SQ-300i Hybrid est installé dans une armoire qui assure l'alimentation de 
l'appareil. Un dispositif de déconnexion approuvé (disjoncteur) avec une 
séparation minimale de 3,0 mm entre les contacts est installé sur l'armoire, à 
portée de l'opérateur. Les caractéristiques du dispositif de déconnexion 
peuvent varier en fonction de la tension et du courant au site d'installation. 
Ce dispositif de déconnexion est nécessaire pour assurer la protection de 
l'appareil contre les surintensités. 
 
Dans de rares cas, le dispositif de déconnexion se situera à une certaine 
distance de l'armoire de commande. Dans ces cas, il est de la responsabilité 
des sites de s'assurer que l'emplacement du sectionneur est clairement 
affiché et est visible à l'opérateur. 
El control SQ-300i Hybrid se encuentra instalado en un armario eléctrico que 
le proporciona alimentación. Dentro del mismo armario, hay un dispositivo al 
alcance del operador que es de desconexión (disyuntor) los contactos del 
disyuntor están separados por una mínima de 3 mm. El valor nominal del 
disyuntor variará según el voltaje y la corriente de la fuente del lugar de la 
instalación. Se requiere este dispositivo de desconexión para proteger los 
equipos en caso de que se produzca una sobrecarga de corriente. 
En algunas ocasiones, el dispositivo de desconexión se encuentra situado a 
cierta distancia del armario de control. Si tal es el caso, los responsables de 
las instalaciones deben asegurarse de que el usuario pueda ver la ubicación 
del dispositivo de desconexión con facilidad o que dicha ubicación esté 
claramente indicada. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
9
Critical Installation Notes 
 
• The electronic components in the SQ-300i Hybrid can be damaged if 
continually operated in a hot environment. The specifications for this 
control indicate a maximum operating temperature of 104°F (40°C). If 
operating conditions will exceed this temperature, some additional 
means of cooling must be installed. Failure to do so may void the 
warranty. 
Les composants électroniques du microcontrôleur SQ-300i Hybrid 
peuvent être endommagés s'ils fonctionnent continuellement dans un 
environnement chaud. Les spécifications de cette commande 
indiquent une température de fonctionnement maximale de 104° F 
(40° C). Si les conditions de fonctionnement dépas sent cette 
température, des moyens de refroidissement supplémentaires 
doivent être installés. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut annuler 
la garantie. 
Los componentes electrónicos en el microcontrolador pueden 
dañarse si funcionan permanentemente en un medio caluroso. Las 
especificaciones para este control indican una temperatura máxima 
de funcionamiento de 104ºF (40ºC). Si las condiciones de 
funcionamiento exceden esta temperatura, se debe instalar algún tipo 
de enfriamiento extra. El hecho de no hacerlo puede anular la 
garantía. 
 
• Although the SQ-300i Hybrid hardware may be used to control a 
single-phase or a 3-phase power supply, this unit is factory-set to 
control a single-phase. If you are controlling a 3-phase power supply, 
contact B&W support so this control can be reconfigured. 
Connecting to the wrong power supply type may lead to catastrophic 
failure of the control and related components. 
Bien que le matériel SQ-300i Hybrid peut être utilisé pour contrôler 
une seule phase ou une alimentation à 3 phases, cet appareil est 
réglé en usine pour contrôler une seule phase. Si vous contrôlez une 
alimentation à 3 phases, le contact B & W soutien ce contrôle ne peut 
être reconfiguré. Connexion au type d'alimentation incorrect peut 
conduire à l'échec catastrophique de la commande et des 
composants connexes. 
Aunque el hardware SQ-300i Hybrid se puede usar para controlar una 
sola fase o una fuentede alimentación de 3 fases, esta unidad es 
para controlar una sola fase ajustada en fábrica. Si está controlando 
una fuente de alimentaciónde 3 fases, el contacto B & W apoyo por lo 
que este control puede ser reconfigurado. Conexión con el tipo de 
fuente de alimentación incorrecta puede conducir a una falla 
catastrófica del control y los componentes relacionados. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
10
 
� 
 
• In order for the SQ-300i Hybrid control to comply with CE 
requirements, a ferrite bead must be installed. This part has been 
shipped with your control. Please refer to the typical installation 
drawings for details. 
Afin que le contrôleur SQ-300i Hybrid soit conforme aux exigences de 
la CE, une perle de ferrite doivent être installés. Ces pièces ont été 
expédiées avec votre contrôleur. Veuillez consulter les dessins 
d'installation types pour plus de détails. 
Para que el control SQ-300i Hybrid cumpla con los requisitos de la 
norma CE, se debe instalar un núcleo de ferrita. Estos componentes 
han sido enviados junto con su control. Para más detalles, remítase a 
los planos típicos de instalación. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
11
Principles Of Operation 
Overview 
The new SQ-300i Hybrid Controller is the first commercially available automatic voltage control 
with the ability to manage different power supply types. This single-module controller is capable of 
operating a conventional, single-phase power supply or a 3-phase power supply with a simple 
firmware change. Though this controller boasts several major enhancements, it is based on the 
trusted design of the SQ-300 and SQ-300i controls. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid is designed to recognize a variety of user interface options. Each of the 
options provides complete access to operator settings and device control. 
 
Once all of the control settings are entered and the SQ-300i Hybrid is in operation, the control will 
automatically maintain the precipitator field voltage at its highest practical level at all times under 
any condition of load. To do this, the control uses technology pioneered by B&W. 
 
When the SQ-300i Hybrid is started, its operation is fully automatic. The precipitator field power is 
ramped up until any limit (i.e., primary current limit, KV limit, etc.) is reached or until a spark or arc 
occurs. It is important to note that the control could be characterized as an "aggressive" control that 
works to put the highest level of power possible into the precipitator field. If the SQ-300i Hybrid 
reaches a limit, it will continue to run at that limit until a spark or arc occurs. 
 
Once a spark occurs, spark response is a rapid quench. This means the SQ-300i Hybrid does not 
allow the SCR to fire for one or more full cycles, depending on the programming. Quench is then 
followed by a fast ramp return to the set back level which is a user-adjustable percentage of the 
power level at the spark or arc. Once the control reaches that set back level, it begins a slow ramp 
up to the next spark or limit. The slow ramp rate is automatically adjusted. The control will continue 
the slow ramp to the last known limit it reached. If no spark, arc or limit is encountered at that level, 
the control will continue at the slow ramp rate until the recovery ramp delay expires. If the control 
still does not reach a limit or a spark, the control will use the recovery ramp rate (which is defined 
internally). 
 
 
Spark Detection 
The SQ-300i Hybrid can detect sparks using either secondary current or secondary voltage. In 
general (and by default), secondary current is used because there is less electrical noise on this 
signal, providing more reliable spark detection. 
 
When secondary current is used, the SQ-300i Hybrid detects a spark by a short, rapid rise of 
secondary current in the precipitator field. When secondary voltage is used, the SQ-300i Hybrid 
detects a spark by a short, rapid decrease in secondary voltage in the precipitator field. 
 
Please note that the effect of a spark on the precipitator is a rapid increase in current and a rapid 
decrease in voltage. This is analogous to briefly shorting the precipitator field. Therefore, the 
SQ-300i Hybrid, when using either current or voltage for spark detection, is basically detecting this 
brief short circuit condition. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
12
SQ-300i Operations with CLR Control 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase is programmed to measure and display the primary form factor 
and secondary fractional conduction during control operation. Using these Operate screens 
(described later) on a regular basis can be a tremendous aid in that you can verify the efficiency of 
the entire electrical system and the correct sizing of the CLR and other electrical components. 
 
Primary form factor and secondary fractional conduction are interdependent; the values of both 
need to be at optimum levels in order to achieve full rated power from a TR Set. These values are 
also affected by the adjustment of the size of the CLR or other electrical components. 
 
Primary form factor is a measure of the shape of the primary current waveform. It is measured by 
dividing the RMS primary current by the average primary current. The ideal theoretical value for 
primary form factor is 1.11; however, this is rarely seen in precipitator operation. Generally, the 
most optimum form factor that can be achieved in a precipitator is 1.2. Higher form factors provide 
for less than full rated power to the TR Set. 
 
Secondary fractional conduction is a measure of the shape and duration of the secondary current 
pulse relative to the maximum time period possible. The ideal theoretical value of secondary 
fractional conduction is 1; however, full rated power can be obtained from a TR Set with secondary 
fractional conductions of approximately .86. Lower fractional conductions provide for less than full 
rated power from the TR Set. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
13
Description Of Features 
Overview 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Automatic Voltage Control is destined to become the new industry standard. 
Based on the original SQ-300 AVC, this reinvented control features a compact, less complicated 
single-module design, fast communication speeds, and the unprecedented flexibility that many 
customers are looking for. 
 
 
Control System Design 
The design of the SQ-300i Hybrid is the key to a more flexible precipitator voltage control system. A 
single control module can now control either a single-phase or a 3-phase power supply with a 
simple firmware change. An optional Operator Interface may be used to manage one or multiple 
controls. (As previously mentioned, there are several interface options. See the Operator Interface 
topic later in this section.) 
 
Because this system is so adaptable, system configuration may vary widely. Connections between 
the Microcontroller, the operator interface, remote computers, and other systems are made using 
Ethernet cables. [See also, System Configuration (Examples).] All components have been 
designed for easy removal and service by disengaging the field terminals and/or cable without 
disturbing any field wiring in the electrical cabinet. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid controller's design also provides protection from the harsh conditions of the 
precipitator environment. Because of this, the Operator Interface is mounted on the electrical 
cabinet door to create an additional shield from the temperature and interference present within the 
electrical cabinet. In addition, the design provides sufficient heat sinking to allow for operationat 
elevated temperatures. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid design utilizes integrated circuitry with two parallel process CPUs; one for 
control functions and one for communications. This design provides independence and speed of 
all operations and communications. These process CPUs operate all control functions of the 
precipitator system, including initiating action to fire the main line SCRs, and detection and control 
of arcs, sparks, and fault conditions. By using a separate process CPU for communications, the 
control can display operating conditions of the precipitator electrical system at the operator 
interface (if applicable), retrieve, store and update data, and communicate to a local or remote 
device - all at a high speed, simultaneously and with no degradation of performance. 
 
All of the built-in analog inputs (volts, amps) are conditioned by the analog circuitry before being 
measured by the microcontroller; this provides increased measurement accuracy (1%), proper 
impedance matching, and reverse polarity and over voltage protection. This degree of accuracy is 
obtained by design, not calibration, for ease of installation. No field calibration of inputs is 
necessary. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
14
Control Compatibility 
The SQ-300i Hybrid is completely compatible with all standard original equipment precipitator 
voltage control systems, including any existing or new analog meters. In addition to providing its 
own complete displays, the SQ-300i Hybrid is fully capable of operating with these standard meters 
without the need for calibration: 
 
• Primary Voltage (volts) • Secondary Voltage (kilovolts) 
• Primary Current (amps) • Secondary Current (milliamps) 
 
Silicon Controlled Rectifiers 
The SQ-300i Hybrid will operate all conventional silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) regardless of 
rating. 
 
Saturable Core Reactors 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase can also work with all conventional saturable core reactors, with 
the addition of an optional external DC Power Module. The normal SCR firing output of the 
SQ-300i connects directly to this module. 
 
Transformer/Rectifier Sets 
The SQ-300i Hybrid is designed to work with all conventional, single-phase TR sets or 3-Phase TR 
Sets (depending on the installed firmware), regardless of manufacturer or rating. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid will measure, display, and operate with or without a secondary voltage input 
from the TR. The control's primary and secondary current scale and display can be scaled to match 
the current rating of any TR Set(s). 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid can also operate with aftermarket voltage dividers with no degradation in 
performance. 
 
Controller Assembly 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Controller unit controls power to the precipitator system. This single assembly 
handles all field connections and is mounted inside the electrical cabinet. Because removable 
terminals are provided for all field wiring, the assembly can be removed easily without disturbing 
any field wiring. 
 
 Inputs/Outputs 
The inputs and outputs for the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller are located on terminals J1 and J2. They 
are described later and include the following: 
 
• Control Power Input • Communications Inputs and Outputs 
• Primary Current Input • Secondary Voltage Input 
• Secondary Current Input • External Enable Input 
• Analog Input for Remote Control • Alarm Relay Output 
• Ground • Aux Relay Output 
• 5 Volt Power Supply Output 
 
 SCR Firing Inputs and Outputs 
The inputs and outputs for SCR Firing are located on terminals J5 and J6. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
15
Transient Filter Board Inputs 
The Transient Filter Board is a device used to protect the SQ-300i Hybrid AVC. Its purpose is to 
stop transients from getting to the control from the Transformer/Rectifier (TR) Set. If left 
unchecked, transient current could damage or destroy the control. The inputs are located on J1 
and J2 of the transient filter board. They are described later and include the following: 
 
• Secondary Voltage Input • Secondary Current Input 
 
� For wiring instructions, it is important to follow the specific installation 
schematic provided with the control. 
 
Operator Interface 
The primary man-machine interface for the control is the SQControl software which may be 
installed on any of these devices: the optional Operator Interface Assembly or a Microsoft® 
Windows®-compatible laptop, tablet computer, or PC. After initial setup, you may prefer to use the 
Precipitator Manager software application, or a program that uses any Modbus® TCP/IP standard 
protocol conforming to the control’s memory map. (This last option gives you the opportunity to use 
software or systems that are already available and familiar, which can also reduce the cost of the 
system.) One additional interface option is the Auxiliary Display. This mini display has limited 
monitoring and control capabilities. Please refer to the Auxiliary Display section for more. 
 
Throughout this manual, control operation will be described using the SQControl software (which 
may be installed on the Operator Interface Assembly or on a laptop, tablet, or PC). If the 
Precipitator Manager software has been selected as your operator interface, please refer to the 
Precipitator Manager software manual. If the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller will be controlled via a 
Modbus® TCP/IP application, please refer to the Memory Map section of this manual. 
 
Remote Diagnostics 
The SQ-300i Hybrid can be monitored from a remote location for trouble-shooting. An Ethernet 
switch and an Ethernet cable are all that are required to access all control information over the 
network. 
 
With Remote Diagnostics, the SQ-300i Hybrid can be serviced without sending a field service 
engineer to the site for trouble-shooting. In addition, each control setting can be adjusted remotely. 
 
Construction 
The SQ-300i Hybrid has been built with the highest grade of components available using superior 
standards of quality control. Each control is carefully assembled and inspected for the highest 
possible level of craftsmanship to help assure flawless operation and long-term reliability. 
 
Conformal Coating 
A protective conformal coating is applied to the printed circuit boards and component surfaces to 
protect them from the adverse effects of extreme heat and cold, dust, moisture, and chemical 
attack. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
16
Ethernet Communication (J4) 
The SQ-300i Hybrid takes advantage of the faster communication speeds available with Ethernet. 
Each Operator Interface and SQ-300i Hybrid Controller is equipped with a standard RJ-45 Ethernet 
communications port. This port is used to connect these two components, or to connect either 
component to an Ethernet switch. The Ethernet switch is used to connect multiple SQ-300i Hybrid 
Controllers to one Operator Interface, or to connect Controllers to a remote computer and other 
systems. Each Controller has a unique IP address (set using SQDiscover) that is used to identify 
the control within the system; no port selection switches or address switches are necessary. 
(Please refer to the Communications Networks section for important cable and connector 
recommendations.) 
 
Reset Button 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Controller features a reset button that can be used if the control is unable to 
recover from an error condition, or if the control profile becomes corrupt. (This button resets all of 
the configuration settings including the IP address, subnet mask, and the control name.) Refer to 
the Using the Reset Feature section for details and cautionary statement. 
 
 
 
Control Connections 
Connections to the SQ-300i Hybrid are describedbelow. Please refer to the drawings shipped with 
the control for important notes, wire specifications, and installation instructions. 
 
SQ-300i Hybrid Controller Connections 
J1 Connector 
The terminals on J1 provide control power and main power alarm signals. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pin Function Ratings 
J1-1 Control Power-Ground 
J1-2 Control Power- Neutral 120-240VAC, 50/60Hz, 92VA 
J1-3 Control Power- Hot 120-240VAC, 50/60Hz, 92VA 
J1-4 Dry Alarm Contact 
User-Selected Open/Closed 
5A, 240VAC/30VDC 
J1-5 5A, 240VAC/30VDC 
J1-6 Dry Aux Contact 
 
5A, 240VAC/30VDC 
J1-7 5A, 240VAC/30VDC 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
17
J2 Connector 
The terminals on J2 provide low voltage sensing. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J3 Connector 
The J3 connector is a standard USB port. This is reserved for future enhancements. 
 
 
J4 Connector 
The J4 connector is a standard, RJ45 Ethernet port. This port is used to connect the Controller to 
either an Operator Interface or an Ethernet switch. 
 
 
J5 Connector 
The terminals on J5 provide the links to SCR-1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pin Function Ratings 
J2-1 RS485 Signal A +/- 15VDC 
J2-2 RS485 Signal B +/- 15VDC 
J2-3 Chassis Ground 
J2-4 5VDC Power Output 5VDC 
J2-5 
External Enable (User 
Defined Function) 
0-5VDC 
J2-6 Primary Current 0-10VAC 
J2-7 Not Used 
J2-8 Not Used 
J2-9 Secondary Voltage Input 0-(-10VDC) 
J2-10 Analog Input 0-5VDC 
J2-11 Secondary Current Input 0-10VDC 
J2-12 Signal Ground 
Pin Function Ratings 
J5-1 SCR 1 Gate 630VAC, 250uA 
J5-2 SCR 1 Cathode 630VAC, 250uA 
J5-3 Chassis Ground 
J5-4 Not Used 
J5-5 Not Used 
J5-6 Not Used 
J5-7 Not Used 
J5-8 Voltage Return 
J5-9 Not Used 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
18
J6 Connector 
The terminals on J6 provide the links to SCR-2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Transient Filter Board Connections 
J1 Connector 
The terminals on J1 carry the signals from the scaling resistors to the Filter Board. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
J2 Connector 
The terminals on J2 carry the filtered signals from the Filter Board to the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pin Function Ratings 
J6-1 SCR 2 Gate 630VAC, 250uA 
J6-2 SCR 2 Cathode 630VAC, 250uA 
J6-3 Chassis Ground 
J6-4 Not Used 
J6-5 Primary Voltage TR Set Input 630VAC, 250uA 
J6-6 Not Used 
J6-7 Not Used 
J6-8 Voltage Return 
J6-9 Not Used 
Pin Function 
J1-1 Not Used 
J1-2 Secondary Voltage Input 
J1-3 Secondary Current Input 
Pin Function 
J2-1 Secondary Current Input 
J2-2 Secondary Voltage Input 
J2-3 Not Used 
J2-4 Ground 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
19
SQControl Software 
Each shipment of SQ-300i Hybrid controllers will include at least one copy of the SQControl 
software. This software provides all of the basic setup for the control, as well as many advanced 
features useful for data analysis and troubleshooting. SQControl software screenshots are 
displayed throughout this manual. 
 
This software may be used on the optional Operator Interface (on the control cabinet), or on a 
laptop or pc connected to the control network. 
 
Real Time Data Display 
Several of the key real time analog values are displayed both as a real time digital display and as a 
virtual meter. The meter provides a very user-friendly display that illustrates rapidly changing data 
better than the conventional digital display. In addition, some of the data is displayed using a real 
time trend that illustrates gradual changes better than the digital display alone. 
 
On-Board Trending 
The SQControl software includes a real time trending option which records and displays various 
data parameters. You may select up to 6 parameters to display on the graph at a time, and data 
may be viewed in 6-minute or 6-hour increments. 
 
On-Board Scope 
The on-board Scope feature supplies you with a safer way to capture and view waveforms. The 
on-board Scope comes with scaling options, waveform navigation, the ability to save and load 
waveforms, and a trigger menu (just like an oscilloscope). Once the waveforms have been 
captured, they can be used for verifying proper operation and troubleshooting. 
 
Security 
The SQControl software has a built-in security feature that provides two separate levels of 
protection designed to prevent unauthorized changes to the control. Security features a User and 
an Administrator password. The User password will be required to access many basic features; the 
Administrator password will be required to access more critical features (such as TR Set Sizing). 
 
Programmable Alarms 
The SQControl software provides five alarms, the trip points of which can be individually set. 
Different trip points can be set in each SQ-300i Hybrid controller. Each alarm will be displayed 
on-screen, on the status line. The five alarms are as follows: Primary Overcurrent Alarm, Primary 
Undervoltage Alarm, Secondary Overcurrent Alarm, Secondary Undervoltage Alarm, and 
Imbalance Alarm. 
 
Rapper Control (Optional) 
The SQ-300i Hybrid model (with optional output modules) may be a voltage control and a rapper 
control! The rapper control version has four outputs for rapper control. The SQ-300i Hybrid will 
automatically control the tumbling hammer type rappers based on individual settings for On and Off 
Time, and Reduced Power Rapp. The Rapper Halt Delay setting assures that rapping will continue 
for a selected period if the control is halted. These rapper outputs may also be controlled using the 
Precipitator Manager software. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
20
Analog and Digital I/O (Optional) 
The SQ-300i Hybrid, combined with optional add-on hardware, has the ability to access analog and 
digital inputs and outputs. The SQ-300i Hybrid will be able to control the digital outputs. For 
example, using the optional digital output assembly, the SQ-300i Hybrid may be used to control 4 
tumbling hammer rappers, based on individual settings for on and off times, halt delay and rapper 
reduced power off. 
 
NWL Control Support 
Using SQControl software, you can monitor the operation of the NWL PowerPlus™ control, and 
have limited control capabilities. You will be able to start, stop, and reduce the power level, set 
selected parameters, run V-I Curves, and monitor alarms and events. For detailed information on 
the NWL PowerPlus™, please refer to NWL documentation. 
 
 
Associated Software 
The following programs are shipped with the SQControl software as part of the Master Installer. 
 
SQDiscover 
The SQDiscover software is used to identify any SQ-300i control on the network by IP address and 
MAC address. It is also used for initial configuration of the SQ-300i Hybrid controller. You may run 
the program from the hard drive of a computer that is connected to the control network. 
 
SQControl OPC Server 
The SQControl software now has its own OPC Server that supports a set of SQControl tags that 
you can subscribe to with an external OPC client. This provides a means for external systems 
(such as DCS or plant historian systems) to monitor the data generated by the B&W SQ-300i 
Hybrid and NWL PowerPlus™ controls and, to a limited extent, manage the operation of the 
controls (such as running/halting a control). The SQControl OPC Server also ships with the B&W 
OPC Browser that may be installed on a remote machine for monitoring and controlling tags. 
 
SQProgram 
The SQProgram software is a simple utility used to update the firmware on the SQ-300i Hybrid 
controller. You mayrun the program from the hard drive of a computer that is connected to the 
control network. 
 
 
System Configuration (Examples) 
Configuring your precipitator control system will depend on many factors. For example: 
 
• Do you want the ability to monitor and edit settings locally? 
• Do you want the ability to monitor and edit settings at each control? 
• Do you want to connect the controls to a remote computer? 
• Do you need these controls to interface with other systems? 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid provides the flexibility to satisfy each of these system requirements. Here are 
some examples. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
21
 
 
One Operator Interface for Each Control 
 
 
 
One Auxiliary Display for Each Control 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
22
 
 
One Operator Interface for Multiple Controls 
 
 
 
Operator Interface (via the SQ Control software) on Remote Computer 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
23
 
 
 
Multiple Operator Interfaces, Each Monitoring Multiple Controls 
 
 
 
Portable Interface Capability with SQControl Software on a Tablet Computer 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
24
Installing the SQControl Software 
The SQControl software is the default interface option for the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller. This 
software will be used to perform initial configuration for the microcontroller, and may be used for 
monitoring and control. SQControl software provides access to all of the basic operational settings 
and run/halt control. It also offers special features not previously available with the SQ-300® AVC. 
 
The SQControl software may be installed on the optional Operator Interface, a laptop, a control 
room computer, or a remote computer for communication with one or more SQ-300i Hybrid 
Controllers. If the Operator Interface was not purchased, the SQControl software (or Precipitator 
Manager software) is required to perform initial setup of the Microcontroller. 
 
This section describes what you need to run the SQControl software, and it explains how to: 
 
• Install the software on a laptop or pc 
• Install the software on an Operator Interface 
• Confirm the system date and time 
• Start the software 
 
 
Recommended System Specifications (for Laptop or PC) 
If you are using your own laptop or pc to run the SQControl software, be sure to familiarize yourself 
with the program’s system requirements. You can read about them in the B&W Computer/Software 
Supplement Owner’s Manual. 
 
The SQControl software also requires the following: 
 
1. Category 6 Ethernet cable and connectors (to provide communication to one or more devices) 
2. Commercial or industrial grade Ethernet switches and routers (to provide network 
communication for multiple devices) 
 
Please refer to the Communications Networks section for recommended network 
communication parts. 
 
If you are unsure if your system meets these specifications, call your B&W Account Representative. 
(See also, Service.) If B&W has supplied the computer system to run this version of software, it will 
meet the recommended system specifications, and will have the SQControl software already 
installed. 
 
 
Installing SQControl on a Laptop or PC 
B&W distributes the SQControl software on a thumb drive (flash drive), email, the Web, or a 
network location. The setup program used to install the program is called SQControl_setup.exe . 
Each installation program: 
• Installs the SQControl software in the C:\Program Files\BW PGG or the C:\Program 
Files(x86)\BW PGG directory§ 
• Installs associated software 
• Creates a shortcut in the Windows® program list for starting the software 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
25
 
 
To install the SQControl software 
• If necessary, start the Microsoft® Windows® operating system and sign on as the administrator. 
• Back up your system and close any running Windows®-based programs. 
• Obtain and start the setup program. 
From thumb drive 
 
• Place the thumb drive in an available USB port. 
• Use My Computer or Windows® Explorer to find the thumb 
drive (removable storage device) and the setup program 
(SQControl_Setup.exe ). 
• Copy the setup file to any location on the computer hard drive. 
• Double-click on the setup file to start it. 
• 
From email 
 
• Open the email, and save the SQControl_Setup.exe to any 
location on the computer hard drive. 
• Go to the saved file and open it. 
From a Web or 
network location 
 
• Locate the SQControl_Setup.exe file on the Web or network 
and save it to any location on the computer hard drive. 
• Go to the saved file and open it. 
 
• If a message prompts you for permission to make changes to the computer, click the Yes 
button. 
• In the Welcome dialog, click Next . 
• Please read the License Agreement. 
• Click the I Agree check box and then click Next ; otherwise, click Cancel to stop the installation. 
• Select the PC installation option. (Only select one.) Click Next to continue. 
• 
• Review the installation details, then click Next to install the software. 
• During the installation, the OPC installation will appear. Read the license agreement, then 
select “I Agree” and click Next . 
• Review the installation folder details. Click Browse to select another location, if needed. 
• Select the Everyone radio button, then click Next . 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
26
• Click Next again to proceed with the OPC installation. When the installation is complete, click 
Close to exit. 
• Click Finish to complete the installation process. 
• When the installation is complete, restart the computer. 
Installing SQControl on the Operator Interface 
The SQ-300i Operator Interface is shipped with the SQControl software already installed. If it 
becomes necessary to update the software on the Operator Interface, please use this procedure. 
� 
Note : If you are mixing older operator interfaces (with SQControl versions 1.14.0.6 
and earlier) with new SQ-300i controls (with firmware versions 26.2 and later), be 
sure to update the SQControl software on all of the operator interfaces. 
 
B&W typically distributes the Operator Interface software on a thumb drive (or flash drive). This 
thumb drive will contain the Basic setup program SQControl_setup.exe . This program: 
• Installs the SQControl software in the C:\Program Files\BW PGG or the C:\Program 
Files(x86)\BW PGG directory§ 
• Installs associated software 
• Creates a shortcut in the Windows® program list for starting the software 
 
To install the SQControl software 
• Although B&W typically distributes this software on a thumb drive, it may be distributed via 
email or a web or network location. If necessary, access and copy the software update as 
instructed here, then prepare to access the Operator Interface. 
From email 
(Basic Install) 
• Using your laptop or pc, open the email, and copy the 
SQControl_Setup.exe to a thumb drive. 
From a Web or 
network location 
(Basic Install) 
• Using your laptop or pc, locate the setup file on the Web or 
network, and copy the SQControl_Setup.exe to a thumb 
drive. 
 
 
• Prepare to access the Operator Interface. 
 
 
 
• WARNING – Follow safety instructions and disconnect all power 
before opening the cabinet! 
AVERTISSEMENT - Suivez les instructions de sécurité et débrancher 
avant d'ouvrir l'armoire! 
ADVERTENCIA - Siga las instrucciones de seguridad y desconectar 
la alimentación antes de abrir lacaja! 
 
 
• Disconnect all power and open the AVC cabinet. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
27
• Locate an available USB port on the Operator Interface and insert the thumb drive. Make sure 
the thumb drive is secure. 
• Carefully close and lock the cabinet door. 
• Reapply power to the AVC cabinet. 
• If necessary, start the Microsoft® Windows® operating system on the Operator Interface and 
sign on as the administrator. 
• Close any running Windows®-based programs. (The SQControl application should start 
automatically when the cabinet powers up; shut this program down and exit to Windows.) 
• Start the setup program. 
From a Thumb 
Drive 
 
• Use My Computer or Windows® Explorer to find the thumb 
drive (removable storage device) and the setup program 
(SQControl_Setup.exe ). 
• Copy the setup file to any location on the computer hard 
drive. 
• Double-click on the setup file to start it. 
• 
• If a message prompts you for permission to make changes to the computer, press or click the 
Yes button. 
• In the Welcome dialog, press or click Next . 
• Please read the License Agreement. 
• Click the I Agree check box and then press or click Next ; otherwise, click Cancel to stop the 
installation. 
• Select the Operator Interface option (Only select one.). Press or click Next to continue. 
• 
• Review the installation details, then press or click Next to install the software. 
• During the installation, the OPC installation will appear. Read the license agreement, then 
select I Agree and press Next . 
• Review the installation folder details. Press Browse to select another location, if needed. 
• Select the Everyone radio button, then press Next . 
• Press Next again to proceed with the OPC installation. When the installation is complete, 
press Close to exit. 
• Press or click Finish to complete the installation process. 
• Prepare to access the Operator Interface again. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
28
 
 
 
• WARNING – Follow safety instructions and disconnect all power 
before opening the cabinet! 
AVERTISSEMENT - Suivez les instructions de sécurité et débrancher 
avant d'ouvrir l'armoire! 
ADVERTENCIA - Siga las instrucciones de seguridad y desconectar 
la alimentación antes de abrir la caja! 
 
• Disconnect all power and open the AVC cabinet. 
• Locate and remove the thumb drive. 
• Close and lock the cabinet door. 
• Reapply power to the AVC cabinet. 
• The SQControl application should start automatically when the cabinet powers up. 
 
 
 
Start the SQControl Software 
After the SQControl software files have been installed and the computer has been restarted, the 
program is ready to run. 
 
� 
Note : On the optional Operator Interface, the SQControl software should start 
automatically when the device is restarted. If it does not start automatically, follow 
the steps below. 
 
• On the Windows® taskbar, click Start . 
• Point to Programs or All Programs , and then point to SQControl . 
• Click SQControl . 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
29
Installing the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller 
Overview 
SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and Transient Filter Board installation is typically performed by trained, 
B&W Field Service Technicians. However, in some cases, the plant may choose to install the 
control. Component installation should proceed in the order it is presented in this manual. If you 
have any questions concerning the installation, please contact your B&W representative. 
 
If you need to install the optional SQ-300i Operator Interface, an Auxiliary Display, or the SQControl 
Software, please refer to the appropriate section for instructions. 
 
 • Use care when wiring the SQ-300i Hybrid control. Improper wiring 
may result in malfunction of the product or damage to property or 
equipment. 
Soyez prudent lors du câblage du contrôleur SQ-300i. Un câblage 
incorrect peut entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement de l'appareil ou 
des dommages pour le matériel ou les équipements. 
Tenga mucho cuidado cuando cablea el SQ-300i. Errores en el 
cableado pueden causar mal funcionamiento del control y/o daño del 
equipo o propiedad. 
� 
• Please review the Important Safety Notice and the Critical Installation 
Notes in the front of this manual before beginning any installation. 
 
• DO NOT connect an Ethernet device to the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller 
until instructed to do so. 
 
 
Installation Requirements 
Location Requirements 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and the Transient Filter Board should be installed inside the AVC 
cabinet. Typically, in a single AVC cabinet, the Controller is installed at the top of the back panel. 
In a dual AVC cabinet, it is installed on the left side of the cabinet. The transient filter board should 
be mounted to the panel on the back wall of the cabinet. 
 
� 
• Avoid installing these components… 
…near the primary voltage cabling. 
…near a heat source (CLR, space heater). 
…near the SCR stack. 
• When installing these components… 
…ensure the terminal blocks are accessible. 
…ensure that nothing interferes with the wiring/wiring harness. 
• The SQ-300i Hybrid must be located within 50 feet of the SCR stack. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
30
Power and Environmental Requirements 
For Power and Environmental requirements, please refer to the Specifications section of this 
manual. 
 
 
Installing the SQ-300i Hybrid Components 
Mounting the Components 
Mount the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and Transient Filter Board only after the appropriate locations 
have been determined. 
 
1. Use the mounting template (7993452) provided to prepare for drilling. 
 
� 
 
• If you are mounting the components to an existing back panel, you 
should use self-tapping screws (because you will not be able to add a 
nut to secure each screw). 
 
• If you are not using self-tapping screws, you must tap these holes. 
 
 
2. Drill holes, then mount and secure components. 
(a) Drill and tap 4 holes (for #10 hardware) to mount the Controller. 
(b) Secure the Controller to the mounting surface using 4 screws (#10-32 x 1/2”), 4 flat 
washers (#10), and 4 lock washers (#10). 
(c) Drill and tap 4 holes (for #6 hardware) to mount the Filter Board. 
(d) Secure the Filter Board to the mounting surface using 4 screws (#6-32 x 1”), 4 flat washers 
(#6), and 4 lock washers (#6). 
(e) Drill and tap 2 holes (for #4 hardware) for each resistor to be mounted. 
(f) Secure each resistor to the mounting surface using 2 screws (#4-40 x 3/8”), and a lock 
washer (#4). 
(g) Drill and tap 4 holes (for #10 hardware) for the CT to be mounted. 
(h) Secure the CT to the mounting surface using 4 screws (#10-32 x 1/2”), 4 flat washers (#10), 
and 4 lock washers (#10). 
 
For specific wiring instructions for the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller, Resistors, and the Transient Filter 
Board, please refer to the typical installation drawings shipped with the product. 
 
 
Configuring the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and Operator Interface 
The next step in the installation process is to connect and configure the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller 
and operator interface. This process will be different depending on what type of interface is being 
used and how the system will be configured. This section of the manual will describe both 
non-network and network configurations. These instructions will cover the following interface 
types: the Operator Interface Assembly and the laptop, tablet, or PC with SQControl software. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
31
�• The following instructions assume that the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller 
has already been installed and connected to power. 
• Each SQ-300i Hybrid Controller is shipped with a default/safe IP 
address of 192.168.1.2. 
• The Operator Interface is shipped with a default IP address of 
192.168.1.254 
 
 
 
Setting the Date, Time and Time Zone 
Prior to any other input, the date, time and time zone must be set or confirmed on the Operator 
Interface, laptop, tablet, or PC. 
 
• When the Operator Interface is powered on, it will automatically open the SQControl 
software application. Exit the application and Exit to Windows. Set the current date, time 
and time zone for your locale. 
• Reboot the system or click on the application icon to start the application. 
 
• For PC, tablet, and laptop users, verify that the current date, time and time zone settings 
are accurate for your locale. 
 
If these settings are not accurate, all data utilizing date and time will also be inaccurate. 
 
 
Non-Network-Type Configuration 
If the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and the operator interface will not be connected to a network then 
they can function as a stand-alone system and the IP address configuration does not need to be 
changed for either. The Operator Interface and the Controller will be able to communicate with 
each other using the factory settings. 
 
To configure one SQ-300i Hybrid Controller to one Operator Interface (Touch Screen or PC) for 
stand-alone operation: 
 
1. If a laptop, tablet, or PC is being used as the operator interface, set the computer network 
interface parameters to Fixed IP Address with an IP address of 192.168.1.254, and a 
subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. 
2. Remove power from the Controller and the operator interface. 
3. Install the recommended CAT 6 cable between the Controller and the operator interface. 
4. Apply power to the Controller and the operator interface. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
32
Network-Type Configuration 
If the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and operator interface will be connected to a network, new IP 
addresses and subnets must be set. The Controller must have a unique and fixed IP address. The 
operator interface must have a unique IP address, and the subnet mask must be the same as the 
subnet mask on the Controller. B&W also recommends that the AVC control system be assigned 
its own subnet. Consult your IT Department or Network Administrator for guidance on selecting IP 
addresses and subnet mask information. 
 
At the appropriate steps in this procedure, the new IP addresses and subnets will need to be set. 
You must use the SQDiscover software to do this. Refer to Microsoft Windows Network 
Hardware Configuration documentation for guidance on changing the IP address of the Operator 
Interface. 
 
To configure the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and the operator interface (Touch Screen or PC): 
 
1. If a laptop, tablet, or PC is being used as the operator interface, remove it from the network. 
Set the computer network interface parameters to Fixed IP Address with an IP address of 
192.168.1.254, and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. 
2. Remove power from the Controller and the operator interface. 
3. Install the recommended CAT 6 cable between the Controller and the operator interface. 
4. Apply power to the Controller and the operator interface. 
5. Use SQDiscover to change the IP address of the Controller to a fixed, unique IP address. 
(Refer to the SQDiscover section for more details.) 
6. Remove power from the Controller. 
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for each Controller that will be connected to the network, giving each a 
fixed, unique IP address. 
8. Change the IP address of the operator interface to a unique IP address. 
a. Click Start then select Control Panel . 
b. Click on the Network and Sharing Center link. 
c. Click on the Local Area Connection link and then click the Properties button. (If the 
computer requests permission to make changes, select Yes.) 
d. Double-click on the appropriate version Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) selection. 
(1) On the General tab, select Use the following IP address: and then enter your 
new IP address and subnet mask. 
(2) Click OK to exit the Internet Protocol dialog, then OK to exit the Local Area 
Connection Properties dialog. Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection 
Status dialog. 
(3) Click on the “X” in the top-right corner to exit the Control Panel screen. 
9. Remove power from the operator interface. 
10. Connect the Operator Interface and the Controller(s) to the network using the 
recommended Ethernet cable and switches. The quantity of cable and switches necessary 
will vary depending upon the number of Controllers and Operator Interfaces that are 
connected to the network. 
11. Apply power to the Controller and operator interface. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
33
Language Selection 
The SQControl software released on February 11, 2008 includes a new Operating System that 
supports the following languages: English, Spanish, Chinese, French, German, Portuguese, and 
Russian. The SQControl software application itself is available in English, and will be available in 
other languages as they are completed. 
 
The SQControl software will automatically detect the language that the operating system is 
configured for; if SQControl is available in that language, it will use that language automatically. If 
you want SQControl to display in a different language, you can use a command line switch to do 
that. (If you want to change the language for the entire system, please contact your system 
Administrator for assistance.) 
 
Select a Different Language Using a Command Line Switch 
• If the SQControl application is running, close the application. (Go to the System Settings 
screen and press or click 
the Shutdown button. 
Enter the password and 
then press or click OK. 
Then press or click the 
Exit to Windows 
button.) 
• If you are running 
SQControl on a 
computer with a 
keyboard, do the 
following: 
o At the Desktop, 
right-click on the 
SQControl icon, 
then select 
Properties . 
o In order to change 
the language, you’re 
going to add a 
command line switch 
on the Shortcut tab. 
o Go to the Target 
field. At the end of 
the line, after the 
quotation marks, 
add a space and 
then the following 
text: /lang:es 
(where es 
represents the new 
language, Spanish). 
This example shows the 
command line switch to 
Spanish 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
34
Language switches that may be supported include: 
en=English 
es=Spanish 
zh=Chinese 
de=German 
fr=French 
 
o Press Apply , and then OK. 
o Restart SQControl. 
 
• If you are running SQControl on the optional Operator Interface (without a keyboard), do the 
following: 
o At the Desktop, open the On-Screen Keyboard. 
o Press the SQControl icon to highlight it. 
o Press the Right Click Menu button on the on-screen keyboard (to access the menu 
for SQControl). 
o Then select Properties . 
o From here, follow the instructions that correspond to the SQControl Properties dialog 
on page 33. 
 
Right Click 
Menu Button 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
35
Navigating the SQ-300i 
Overview 
This section will describe the screens available on the optional Operator Interface or through the 
SQControl software on a remote computer, which should help you locate and access desired 
control features. Several display screens have been reproduced to help you become familiar with 
navigating the control. For additional information on any of these features, refer to the 
Programming and Operation sections ofthe manual. 
 
Keep in mind that the SQControl software and Operator Interface may be used with the SQ-300i, 
SQ-300i 3-Phase, and the SQ-300i Hybrid, so you may see all three control types listed. 
 
 
The Operate Screens 
When the control software initiates, the first Operate screen will appear. There are seven Operate 
screens; each have the same basic format but provide a different set of data. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The SQControl software now includes an expanded display (shown above) that is available when 
you run the SQControl software on a computer using a wide-screen format (with an aspect ratio of 
greater than 4:3). This expanded display provides the controls area on the left of the screen for 
easy, one-click selection. This controls area is not visible on the optional Operator Interface. 
Controls area 
Operational area 
Status area 
Navigation area 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
36
To switch to another control using the Operator Interface (without the expanded display), you will 
use the navigation buttons in the bottom-right section of the display. 
 
 
 
 
Working With the Operate Screens 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded 
display) 
 
All of the connected controls are listed at the left of the window. 
 
• To move up or down through the controls list, use the up and down 
arrow buttons at the bottom of the list. 
• To view a different control, touch or click on any listed control. 
 
 
Operational area 
 
Each of the operate screens contain an operating/functional area which 
displays real time data in the form of meters, digital displays and/or 
trends. 
 
• To move from one Operate screen to the next, simply touch or click 
anywhere in this area of the screen. Once the control displays the 
seventh Operate screen, another tap will return you to the first 
Operate screen. 
 
 
Status area 
 
Each operate screen also contains a status area which displays the 
name of the currently selected control, as well as its status. 
 
 
Navigation area 
 
 
This area contains buttons used for navigation to other screens and 
controls. 
 
• The Functions/Operate button toggles the display between 
Functions mode and Operate mode. (While the display is in Operate 
mode, the button will read Functions which will return you to the 
SQ-300i Options screen.) 
• The Table View button allows you to view all of the controls in a list 
that includes key operating parameters for each. 
 
 
Navigation area 
(Operator 
Interface) 
 
• The Back and Next buttons will send the display to the previous or 
next control connected to this Interface (or computer, if applicable). 
• The Jump To button allows you to select a specific control. This is 
especially useful when there are many connected controls. 
 
 
 For a detailed look at the Operate screens, please refer to the Operation section. 
 
 
Additional navigation 
for the Operator 
Interface 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
37
 
Functions Screens 
The Functions screens include the Options screen (below), and the System Settings screen. 
These screens provide access to control programming, special features, and system configuration 
options. 
 
SQ-300i Options Screen 
The SQ-300i Options screen may be used to access settings and select special features for the 
SQ-300i Hybrid control that is named at the top of the screen. This screen also includes the Run 
and Halt buttons. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Most of the options that are available on this screen are specific to the named control only. 
 
Working With the Options Screen 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded 
display) 
 
All of the connected controls are listed at the left of the window. 
 
• To move up or down through the controls list, use the up and down 
arrow buttons at the bottom of the list. 
• To view a different control, touch or click on any listed control. 
 
 
Controls area 
Options area 
Status area 
Navigation area 
Navigation buttons for the Operator Interface 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
38
 
Working With the Options Screen 
 
Options area 
 
• Press or click the RUN button to start SQ-300i Hybrid operation if the 
control is halted. If the control is already operating, this button will 
restart ramping. 
• Press or click the HALT button to stop SQ-300i Hybrid operation by 
halting the firing of the SCRs. If the control is already halted due to 
an alarm, press or click this button to clear the alarm and then press 
or click RUN to restart the control. 
• Press or click the Trending , Scope , VI Curves or Energy 
Management button to access features for the control listed at the 
top of the screen. (See the Control Functions section for more 
information on these features.) 
• Press or click the Set SQ-300i Parameters button to access 
programming for the control listed at the top of the screen. (See the 
Programming section for more information.) 
• Press or click the System Settings button to access additional 
options. 
 
 
Status area 
 
• The Options screen also contains a status area which displays the 
name of the currently selected control, as well as its status. 
 
 
Navigation area 
 
This area contains buttons used for navigation to other screens and 
controls. 
 
• The Functions/Operate button toggles the display between 
Functions mode and Operate mode. (While the display is in 
Functions mode, the button will read Operate. Press or click 
Operate to return to the first Operate screen.) 
• Press or click the Table View button to view all of the controls in a list 
that includes key operating parameters for each. 
 
 
Navigation area 
(Operator 
interface) 
 
• The Back and Next buttons will send the display to the previous or 
next control connected to this Interface (or computer, if applicable). 
• The Jump To button allows you to select a specific control. This is 
especially useful when there are many connected controls. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
39
System Settings Screen 
The System Settings screen provides access to system information and configuration features. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Working With the System Settings Screen 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded 
display) 
 
 
All of the connected controls are listed at the left of the window. 
• To move up or down through the controls list, use the up and down 
arrow buttons at the bottom of the list. 
• To view a different control, touch or click on any listed control. 
 
Settings area • Press or click the Manage Controls button to add, delete, connect or 
disconnect controls. This screen also provides access to the 
Security feature. (See the System Functions section for more 
information.) 
• Press or click the Manage OPC I/O button to view, add, edit or delete 
I/O items. (See the System Functions section for more information.) 
• Press or click the Alarms or Events button to access status and data 
tools for all of the controls in the system. (See the System Functions 
section for more information on these features.) 
• Press or click the About button to view software identification 
information. 
• Press or click the Log Out button to secure the control and require a 
password entry from the next operator who attempts to access a 
password protected area. 
 
Controls area 
Settings area 
Status area 
Navigation area 
Navigation buttons for the Operator Interface 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
40
 
Working With the System Settings Screen 
 
Settings area 
 
• Press or click the Shutdownbutton to shut down the Operator 
Interface and return to the Windows® operating system, or shut down 
the Operator Interface and perform a Windows® operating system 
shut down. (Note: No control functions or editing can be performed 
from the desktop screen.) 
• Press or click the Control Settings button to return to the Options 
screen. 
 
 
Status area 
 
• The System Settings screen also contains a status area which 
displays the name of the currently selected control, as well as its 
status. 
 
 
Navigation area 
 
This area contains buttons used for navigation to other screens and 
controls. 
 
• The Functions/Operate button toggles the display between 
Functions mode and Operate mode. (While the display is in 
Functions mode, the button will read Operate. Press or click 
Operate to return to the first Operate screen.) 
• Press or click the Table View button to view all of the controls in a list 
that includes key operating parameters for each. 
 
 
Navigation area 
(Operator 
interface) 
 
• The Back and Next buttons will send the display to the previous or 
next control connected to this Interface (or computer, if applicable). 
• The Jump To button allows you to select a specific control. This is 
especially useful when there are many connected controls. 
 
 
 
 
Portrait Mode 
Some AVC cabinet installations, especially retrofits, may require that the optional Operator 
Interface be installed vertically to fit in the available space on the cabinet door. To account for this, 
the Operator Interface can now run the SQControl software in Portrait Mode. 
 
To work in Portrait Mode, you won’t have to change any settings in SQControl, but the following 
requirements must be met: 
• The optional Operator Interface must be running the Microsoft® Windows® 7 operating 
system 
• The Microsoft® Windows® display settings must be set to Portrait (as opposed to the 
standard Landscape) 
Working in Portrait Mode, some of the screens will look a lot different than the standard Landscape 
mode, but you won’t lose any of the functionality. Here are some samples of screens in Portrait 
Mode: 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
41
 
The first Operate screen in Portrait Mode. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
42
 
The SQ-300i Options screen in Portrait Mode. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
43
 
 
The Scope screen in Portrait Mode. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
44
 
Security 
The SQ-300i Hybrid has two levels of password protection to help prevent unauthorized changes to 
any of the operating and alarm limits, TR Set Sizing values, Scaling and other protected features. 
 
The two security levels require entry of either a User password or an Administrator password. The 
User password is required for many of the basic features and setting groups. The Administrator 
password is required for some of the more critical features, such as TR Set Sizing, and may also be 
used as a substitute for the User password. Once a password is successfully entered, the 
password is stored and active while you work at the control. 
 
The table below identifies the password associated with specific protected features/settings: 
 
Features Protected by the 
Administrator Password 
Features Prot ected by the 
User Password 
Operating Limits Energy Management 
Alarm Limits Running a V-I Curve 
TR Set Sizing Spark Response 
Scaling Settings Rapper Outputs 
Communications Settings Pulse Blocking Settings 
Manage Controls (and Security) Digital Outputs 
Manage OPC I/O Digital Inputs 
Any NWL Control Configuration Analog Outputs 
Back Corona Settings Analog Inputs 
Shutdown Control Heater/Horn Settings 
 
Default passwords are preset at the factory and are listed in the Default Settings section of the 
manual. For a higher level of security, B&W recommends that you customize the User and the 
Administrator passwords. (Please refer to the Manage Controls feature.) 
 
� 
 
• To maintain the security of the system, manually log out before 
leaving the control. 
 
• No security code is necessary to initiate either the Run or Halt 
functions while the control is operating. 
 
 
To manually log out 
• Press or click the System Settings button on the SQ-300i Options screen, then press or click 
the Log Out button. (The next time you attempt to access a function that is password 
protected, you will be prompted to enter the User password or Administrator password, 
depending on the function.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
45
 
Programming The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase 
Controller 
Overview 
Setting the operating parameters of the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase is easy and requires only 
minutes to accomplish. The SQ-300i Hybrid utilizes a "fill-in-the-blank" method in which you simply 
input the value and press or click the OK button to save the changes. The control prompts this 
action on most set-up screens. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid settings are divided into categories that we refer to as Configuration Groups. 
The Programming section describes how to set each parameter in each of these groups. In order to 
program a specific parameter, you’ll do the following: 
 
• Access the Configuration Groups screen 
• Select a configuration group 
• Select a parameter from the selected group 
 
To access the Configuration Groups screen 
• Go to the Options screen. (If you’re currently on the Operate screens, press or click the 
Functions button.) 
• Check to make sure the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase listed on the screen is the control you 
wish to modify. (If not, use the controls list to select that control.) 
• Then press or click the Set SQ-300i Parameters button. The Select Configuration Group 
screen will appear. It lists all of the setting categories that are available to review or edit. 
 
This screen provides 
access to all of the 
parameter categories for 
the selected control. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
46
 
Working With the Configuration Groups Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Navigation 
 
• Press or click any category name, or press or click the Up Arrow or 
Down Arrow button at the bottom of the Configuration Group screen 
to scroll through the list of available categories to highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to open the selected category. 
• Press or click the Back button to return to the Options screen. 
• Press or click the Save Profile button to save the current profile so it 
can be copied to a different control. The software will pull all of the 
setup parameters for the selected control and write them to a file. 
The file should be saved in the standard program data directory§. 
Note: The software will only store one profile. If you save 
another profile, the existing .pfl file will be overwritten. 
• Press or click the Restore Profile button to copy a saved profile to a 
control. 
 
 
To select a configuration group 
• Press or click any category name, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the Configuration Group screen to scroll through the list of available categories to 
highlight/select an item. 
• Press the Edit button to open the selected category. 
 
 
To select a parameter 
• Press or click any parameter name, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at 
the bottom of the open category screen to scroll through the list of available parametersto 
highlight/select an item. 
• Press the Edit button to open the selected parameter. 
 
� 
 
• Although the SQ-300i Operator Interface and SQControl Software can 
monitor multiple controls, all operating parameter modifications apply 
only to the current control. If modifications need to be made to a 
control other than the current one, then you must access that control 
first. 
 
 
For specific information on the configuration groups and parameters, please refer to the 
configuration group sections that follow. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
47
Transformer/Rectifier Set Sizing 
This version of the SQ-300i is compatible with all conventional, single-phase TR Set brands and 
was designed so that most of the operating parameters of the control are based on the nameplate 
ratings of the TR Sets and the scaling resistors supplied with the control. As a result, it is critical to 
the operation of the TR Set, the control, and the collection efficiency of the precipitator that these 
screens have accurate data entered into them. The transformer/rectifier nameplate ratings are 
essential when entering information into these screens. 
 
These settings should be entered upon initial control setup and should be left alone thereafter. For 
this reason, these settings are protected by the Administrator password. 
 
 • If these settings are changed, and no longer reflect the actual 
nameplate ratings and scaling of a particular TR Set, precipitator and 
control performance could be seriously affected, and equipment 
damage may result. 
 
Si ces paramètres sont modifiés et ne reflètent plus les caractéristiques 
réelles indiquées sur la plaque signalétique et celles des ensembles de 
TR, les performances du dépoussiéreur ou du contrôleur pourraient être 
sérieusement affectées entrainant éventuellement un endommagement 
des équipements. 
 
Importante : en caso de que la configuración se modifique y no coincida 
con los valores nominales de placa y valores de escala del 
transformadore rectificado, el rendimiento del electro-filtro puede verse 
afectado seriamente y el equipo del sistema puede resultar dañado. 
 
To edit the TR set sizing parameters 
Data must be entered into each of the TR Set Sizing screens, with the exception of the TR Primary 
Voltage Rating and the Line Voltage Rating screens. 
• From the Configuration Groups screen, press or click the TR Set Sizing option and then press 
or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged out, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and 
press or click the OK button. 
• The Edit screen for TR Set Sizing will appear. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
48
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll up through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
 
 
 
Backspace Key 
Use the keypad to 
enter a new setting. 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen 
You may edit any of the TR Sizing 
parameters except TR Set Primary 
Type and Hyrid Board Type 
These settings must reflect the 
actual nameplate ratings and 
scaling of the TR Set 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
49
• Use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen provides the valid range of values that may 
be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the TR Set Sizing parameters. 
 
TR Set Primary Voltage Rating 
This setting allows you to enter the TR nameplate rating for primary voltage . The default/safe 
value is 480. 
 
• Press or click the TR Set Primary Voltage Rating option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 800 which represents the TR Primary Voltage Rating. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
TR Set Primary Current Rating 
This setting allows you to enter the TR nameplate rating for primary current . The default/safe 
value is 180. 
 
• Press or click the TR Set Primary Current Rating option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 900 which represents the actual TR Set nameplate 
rating for primary current . 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
TR Set Secondary Current Rating 
This screen allows you to enter the secondary current nameplate rating of the TR Set. In 
conjunction with the spark sensitivity edit screen, the SQ-300i Hybrid automatically sets the spark 
and arc sensitivity range based on this setting. The default/safe value is 1600. 
 
• Press or click the TR Set Secondary Current Rating option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9000 which represents the secondary current nameplate 
rating. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
TR Set Secondary Average Voltage Rating 
This screen allows you to enter the secondary average KV rating of the TR Set. The default/safe 
value is 45. 
 
• Press or click the TR Set Secondary Average Voltage Rating option and then press or 
click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 160. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
TR Set Secondary Peak Voltage Rating 
This screen allows you to enter the secondary peak KV rating of the TR Set. The default/safe 
value is 80. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
50
• Press or click the TR Set Secondary Peak Voltage Rating option and then press or click 
the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 320. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
TR Set Form Factor Rating 
Each TR Set has a form factor rating . This rating is an indication of the primary circuit's ability to 
maintain a near sinusoidal waveform on the primary. As the form factor rating decreases, the 
primary circuit's ability to maintain this waveform increases. 
 
The SQ-300i will measure the form factor in the circuit and display this on one of the Operate 
Screens. The control default/safe value is 1.2. 
 
• Press or click the TR Set Form Factor Rating option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a value between 1.20 and 3.00. Enter any digits to the right of the decimal point. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Minimum Secondary Current for Remote Limits 
This screen allows you to enter the minimum secondary current of the TR Set. This is the 
minimum amount of secondary current that the control will allow any remote limit. The default/safe 
value is 0. 
 
• Press or click the Min Secondary Current option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9000. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Line Voltage Rating 
This screen allows you to enter the incoming line voltage used at installation. The default/safe 
value is 480. 
 
• Press or click the Line Voltage Rating option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 750. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
HZ Rating 
Line frequency is displayed in Hertz, and is updated every half second. The default/safe value is 
60. 
 
• Press or click the Line Frequency optionand then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click either 50 or 60 to set the desired line frequency. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
TR Set Primary Type 
This read-only TR set sizing item simply shows you the TR set type . The type may be any of the 
following: Single (which is the standard), 3-phase, or 750V Primary. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
51
Hybrid Board Type 
This read-only TR set sizing item simply shows you the Hybrid board type . The type may be either 
Single (which is the standard) or 3-phase. 
 
• Press or click the up or down arrows to scroll through the TR Set Sizing settings, or press or 
click the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups page. 
 
 
Scaling Settings 
This screen allows you to set the maximum scale for Primary Current, Secondary Current and 
Secondary Voltage, and enter KV Feedback (if applicable). These settings should be entered upon 
initial setup and should be left alone thereafter. For this reason, these settings are protected by the 
Administrator password. 
 
This screen also includes a few settings that are intended for Field Service use only. These 
adjustments are only needed in specific situations and will be handled by Field Service. 
 
� 
 
• If you enter an odd number as one of your scaling values, the system 
may round it up to the next even magnitude for display purposes. This 
helps standardize the scales used in display objects (like meters). 
 
 
To edit the scaling settings 
• Press or click the Scaling Settings option from the Configuration Groups screen and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged out, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and 
press or click the OK button. The Edit screen for Scaling Settings will appear. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
52
 
• Press or click any parameter or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available options parameters and 
highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Scaling parameters. 
 
Secondary Voltage Feedback 
This screen allows you to select whether or not KV Feedback will be available. If No is selected, the 
readings relating to secondary voltage will not be displayed. The default/safe value is Yes. 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Voltage Feedback option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Press or click No to indicate KV Feedback is not available, or Yes to indicate that KV 
Feedback is available. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
You may edit 
any of these 
scaling settings 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
Deadband % - 
Deadband Ramp 
Ratesettings are 
for Field Service 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
53
Primary Current Scale 
The data entered in this screen will determine the full scale primary current range of the SQ-300i 
Hybrid, measured in amps AC. The full scale range of displays, both digital and bar graph are set 
by this value. This scaling feature allows the maximum measurement resolution for different size 
TR Sets, even when on the same precipitator. The default/safe value is 200. 
 
• Press or click the Primary Current Scale option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 900. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Secondary Current Scale 
The data entered in this screen will determine the full scale secondary current range of the 
SQ-300i Hybrid. This value sets the full scale range of displays. This provides maximum 
measurement resolution for different size TR Sets. The default/safe value is 2000. 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Current Scale and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9000. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
� 
 
• IMPORTANT: The primary current scale and secondary current scale 
must be set to match the selection of resistors (supplied with the 
SQ-300i Hybrid) used in the installation. These resistors are selected 
to give a scale that is greater than or equal to 125% of the TR rating. 
The chart below illustrates several examples of standard resistors. 
Please refer to "Table 1 - Hardware and Software Calibration" on the 
installation drawing for additional, important details. 
 
 
 
TR Rating TR Rating x 1.25 Resistors Scale 
500 mA 625 mA 6 and 30 Ohms 1000 mA 
800 mA 1000 mA 6 and 30 Ohms 1000 mA 
850 mA 1062 mA 3.3 and 10 Ohms 2000 mA 
150 A 187 A 25 Ohms 200 A 
175 A 219 A 50 Ohms and 25 Ohms 300 A 
 
Secondary Voltage Scale 
The setting entered here will determine the full scale secondary voltage range of the SQ-300i 
Hybrid. This value sets the full scale range of displays. (The minimum setting is 0, the default/safe 
setting is 80, and the maximum setting is 160.) 
 
The secondary voltage can be scaled from 0-60 KV to a maximum of 0-160 KV. The scaling used 
will be dependent on the KV ratings of the TR Set. A scale should be chosen that provides the 
ability to read the average and peak secondary voltages. (The peak secondary voltage is scaled 
automatically by doubling the secondary voltage scale.) 
 
At the high end of the scale, a 5 VDC signal will be provided at the input to the SQ-300i Hybrid. This 
5 VDC signal is developed through a sizing resistor (that must be calculated), and it is dependent 
upon the voltage divider size. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
54
� 
 
• Note: If an analog meter will be installed, make sure to take this into 
account when calculating the sizing resistor. 
 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Voltage Scale option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 160. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
• Press or click the up or down arrows to scroll through the Scaling Settings, or press or click 
the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups page. 
 
Primary Voltage Input Source 
This allows the selection of the Primary Voltage Reading to be SCR Output, or TR Set Input. The 
efault is SCR Output, in order to measure the voltage at the TR Set Input, a wire will have to be run 
from the TR Set Input (Node between the CLR and TR Set) to J6-Pin 5. 
 
• Press or click the Primary Voltage Input Source option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Press or click SCR Output or TR Set Input 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Field Service Settings 
The Deadband %, Limit Ramp Rate, and Deadband Ramp Rate are used in combination to expand 
the range around certain control limits, and to slow the ramp rate so that the control operates within 
these limits for a longer period of time. (These settings should only be used by Field Service.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Operating Limits 
It is important to note that even though the SQ-300i Hybrid is scaled based on TR Set nameplate 
ratings, and those ratings are entered in the TR sizing screens, you still need to "tell" the controlat 
what limit to operate. Data must be entered for each of the eight settings associated with the 
Operating Limits. 
 
To edit the operating limits 
 
• From the Configuration Groups screen, press or click the Operating Limits option and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
55
• If the system has been logged out, you will be required to input the Administrator password and 
press or click the OK button. 
• The Edit screen for Operating Limits will appear. 
 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters and highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Operating Limits parameters. 
 
Primary Current Limit 
This screen provides for the selection of the nameplate RMS primary current limit of the TR Set. 
The default/safe value is 10. 
 
• Press or click the Primary Current Limit option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Enter a new value between 0 and 900. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Primary Voltage Limit 
You may edit 
any of these 
settings. 
 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
56
This screen allows you to select the nameplate RMS primary voltage limit of the TR Set. The 
maximum setting allowed is 750 volts AC; the control default/safe value is 10. 
 
• Press or click the Primary Voltage Limit option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 750. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Secondary Current Limit 
This screen allows you to enter the nameplate average secondary current limit of the TR Set. 
The control default/safe value is 100. 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Current Limit option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9000. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Secondary Average Voltage Limit 
This screen allows you to enter the nameplate average secondary voltage limit of the TR Set. (If 
KV Average is selected as the Secondary Voltage Limit Type, the control will be limited by this 
setting. See also, Secondary Voltage Limit Type.) The default/safe value is 10. 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Average Voltage Limit option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 160. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Secondary Peak Voltage Limit 
This screen allows you to enter the nameplate secondary peak voltage limit of the TR Set. (If KV 
Peak is selected as the Secondary Voltage Limit Type, the control will be limited by this setting. 
See also, Secondary Voltage Limit Type.) The default/safe value is 10. 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Peak Voltage Limit option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 320. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 
 
Secondary Voltage Limit Type 
This screen allows you to select either KV Average or KV Peak as the secondary voltage limit 
type . If KV Average is selected, the control will be limited by the secondary voltage limit setting. If 
KV Peak is selected, the control will be limited by the secondary peak voltage limit setting. The 
default/safe value is Average. 
 
• Press or click the Secondary Voltage Limit Type option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Press or click either Average or Peak. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
57
SCR Firing Angle Limit 
This screen allows you to program the SCR firing angle limit . This will provide proper operation 
of the SCRs when there is a low SCR firing angle and a corresponding high conduction angle. The 
SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase AVC automatically provides an SCR firing angle limit at 16°. 
 
 
� 
 
• The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase operates the SCR firing with 180° 
as full off and 16° full on. The SQ-300 i Hybrid Single-Phase will never 
operate the SCRs at less than 16° because the SCRs need a period of 
time to commutate (where SCR 1 turns off, and SCR 2 can be turned 
on). This 16° allows the SCRs time to do this. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
B&W generally recommends that the SCR firing angle limit be set to 45°. The default/safe value is 
35. 
 
• Press or click the SCR Firing Angle Limit option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Enter a number between 16 and 180, which will represent the SCR firing angle limit. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Juice Can Installed 
Use this screen to indicate if a JuiceCan is installed on this field. The SQ-300i Hybrid 
Single-Phase is programmed to use different limits when a JuiceCan is installed, so this setting is 
very important. If this setting changes from “Not Installed” to “Installed,” and associated settings 
are outside of programmed limits for JuiceCan use, the control will automatically correct these 
settings. (For more details, see the Spark Response settings for spark rate and search ramp rate.) 
In addition, if this setting changes from “Not Installed” to “Installed,” Pulse Blocking and the Back 
Corona routine will be disabled. The default/safe value is No. 
 
• Press or click the JuiceCan Installed option and then press or click the Edit button. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
58
• Press or click the No option if a JuiceCan is not installed. Press or click the Yes option if a 
JuiceCan is installed. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Minimum Pri Current Allowed in Manual Mode 
This screen allows you to select the minimum primary current at the manual pot (manual control). 
This is used to override the user-programmed primary current limit setting to a lower setting, and 
thereby, provide remote or manual control. 
 
A setting equal to, or greater than, the primary current limit, will disable this input. The default/safe 
value is 0. 
 
• Press or click the minimum pri current option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 900. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Conduction Limit 
This screen allows you to select the conduction limit . The conduction limit is used to control the 
amount of time the primary current is on, and thereby, provide enough time for the SCRs to turn off. 
 
A setting of 60 sets the primary current conduction time to 60% of the time. A setting of 100% will 
turn this feature off (meaning there is no limit on primary current conduction). The default/safe 
value is 86. 
 
• Press or click the conduction limit option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 60 and 100. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
• Press or click the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the Operating Limits settings, 
or press or click the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups screen.Alarm Limits 
The SQ-300i Hybrid provides six alarms to alert you to abnormal operating conditions, plus two 
additional alarm-related settings. All of these can be individually set in the same manner as the 
Operating Limits. 
 
To determine the alarm limits 
Each of the overcurrent alarm limits should typically be set at 25% above each of the operating 
limits. To determine the percentages, do the following: 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
59
 
• Multiply the limit setting entered in the Operating Limit screen, by 1.25. 
Example: If the primary current limit is set at 200 AAC, multiply 200 x 1.25. The resulting 
primary overcurrent alarm limit is 250. 
 
B&W recommends that the primary undervoltage alarm is set at 50 VAC, and the secondary 
undervoltage alarm is set at 10 KV. 
 
Disabling alarms 
Although the SQ-300i Hybrid allows for the disabling of alarms for trouble-shooting, it is usually not 
required. Sometimes it becomes necessary when the control trips on an alarm before any readings 
or tests can be made. 
 
Disabling alarms can be very dangerous . The decision to disable an 
alarm should only be made by a qualified electrical technician 
experienced with precipitator operations and the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
 
Désactiver les alarmes peut s'avérer très dangereux. La décision de 
désactiver une alarme doit être prise par un technicien qualifié ayant de 
l'expérience dans le fonctionnement des dépoussiéreurs et des 
contrôleurs SQ-300i. 
 
Desactivar alarmas puede ser muy peligroso . La decisión de deactivar 
una alarma puede ser tomada solamente por un técnico en electricista 
calificado y con experiencia tanto en electro-filtros como en el SQ-300i. 
 
To edit the alarm limits 
• Press or click the Alarm Limits option from the Configuration Groups screen and then press or 
click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and 
press or click the OK button. 
• The Edit screen for Alarm Limits will appear. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
60
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters and highlight/select an 
item. Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Alarm Limits parameters. 
 
Primary Over Current Alarm 
This screen allows you to select the RMS primary over current alarm . This alarm will occur if the 
measured primary current has exceeded this setting for 2 seconds. A setting of 0 disables the 
alarm for trouble-shooting. The default/safe value is 200. 
 
• Press or click the primary over current alarm option and then press or click Edit to modify 
the value. 
• Input a value between 0 and 900. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Primary Under Voltage Alarm 
This screen allows you to select the RMS primary under voltage alarm . The maximum setting 
allowed is 750 volts AC. This alarm will occur if the measured primary voltage is below this setting 
for 30 seconds and primary current is at least 20% of TR Set Rating. A setting of 0 disables the 
alarm for trouble-shooting. The default/safe setting is 0. 
 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
You may edit 
any of these 
parameters. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
61
• Press or click the primary under voltage alarm option then press or click Edit to modify 
the value. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 750. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 Secondary Over Current Alarm 
This screen allows you to select the average secondary over current alarm . The Secondary over 
current alarm occurs if the measured secondary current has exceeded this setting for 2 seconds. A 
setting of 0 disables the alarm for trouble-shooting. The default/safe value is 1990. 
 
• Press or click the secondary over current alarm option and then press or click Edit to 
modify the value. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9000. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Secondary Under Voltage Alarm 
This screen allows you to set a secondary under voltage alarm limit for the KV input. The 
secondary under voltage alarm occurs if the measured secondary voltage at the KV input is below 
this setting for 30 seconds and secondary current is at least 20% of TR Set Rating. A setting of 0 
disables the alarm for trouble-shooting. The default/safe value is 0. 
 
• Press or click the secondary under voltage alarm option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a value between 0 and 160. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Under Voltage Alarm Time Delay 
This screen allows you to set an under voltage alarm delay . This setting determines how long the 
alarm conditions must be favorable before the under voltage alarm will trip. For example, if the 
measured secondary voltage at the KV input is below its alarm setting, and secondary current is at 
least 20% of TR Set Rating, and both of these conditions remain true for the length of this delay 
setting, then a secondary under voltage alarm will occur. Valid settings range from 1 to 99 
seconds. If a value is entered outside of this range, the control will use the default/safe value of 30. 
 
• Press or click the under voltage alarm time delay option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a value between 1 and 99. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Imbalance Alarm 
This screen allows you to enable or disable the imbalance alarm . If enabled, the imbalance alarm 
will occur when there are missing or abnormal half cycles in the secondary current waveform. This 
is normally caused by an open main line SCR. The imbalance alarm can be disabled for 
trouble-shooting. The default/safe value is On. 
 
• Press or click the imbalance alarm option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click the Off option to disable or On to enable the alarm. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
62
Alarm Contact Type 
The data entered in this screen will determine whether the alarm relay output on the SQ-300i 
Hybrid will be Normally Open (NO), or Normally Closed (NC). 
 
Generally, the alarm relay output is tied to an interposing relay that can interrupt the power to the 
coil of the main contactor. If this relay uses a NC contact, then the alarm output should be set to NO 
so that when the relay is energized, it opens its NC contacts in the event of an alarm. If the relay 
uses a NO contact, then the alarm output should be set to NC. B&W recommends circuits that use 
a NC interposing relay contact should have the alarm relay output set to NO. The default/safe 
value is Normally Closed. 
 
• Press or click the Alarm Contact Type option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click the Normally Open option to choose a Normally Open alarm relay output, or 
the Normally Closed option to choosea Normally Closed alarm relay output. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Hz Mismatch Alarm 
This screen allows you to enable or disable the Hz Mismatch Alarm . If enabled, the control will 
perform a check to determine if the Hz rating (under TR Set Sizing) matches the detected line 
frequency. The alarm will occur when these do not match. (This check will only occur when the 
control is halted or within 1 second of the control detecting main power on.) The default/safe value 
is On. 
 
• Press or click the Hz Mismatch option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click the Off option to disable or On to enable the alarm. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
• Press or click the up or down arrow button to scroll through the Alarm Limits settings, or 
press or click the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups screen. 
 
 
Spark Response 
The SQ-300i Hybrid responds to high intensity sparks (excursions in the secondary current 
waveform) by completely quenching them to fully extinguish them. After the quench occurs, the 
SQ-300i Hybrid quickly returns the power to the set back level by a fast ramp. 
To edit the spark response 
• Press or click the Spark Response option from the Configuration Groups screen and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Spark Response will appear. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
63
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters and highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Spark Response parameters. 
 
 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
You may edit 
any of these 
parameters. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
64
Graphic representation of spark response 
 
Spark Rate 
This screen allows you to enter the desired spark rate . Available values range from 1 to 99 sparks 
per minute. The slow ramp rate is automatically adjusted based on the spark rate setting, as are 
the Spark Set Back and SCR Firing Angle Limit when a spark or arc occurs. The control 
default/safe setting is 30 sparks per minute. 
 
• Press or click the Spark Rate option to select it and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 1 and 99 which will represent the spark rate (per minute). 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Spark Sensitivity 
Although the SQ-300i Hybrid can automatically adjust spark sensitivity based on the secondary 
current rating as described before, internal precipitator conditions, such as plate-to-wire clearances 
and dust resistivity, affect spark intensity. To help further fine tune ESP operations, the SQ-300i 
Hybrid provides this additional sensitivity setting. 
 
This screen allows settings between 0 (most sensitive) and 9 (least sensitive); this permits up to a 
45% change in the spark detection level. The control default/safe setting is 3. 
 
• Press or click Spark Sensitivity to select it and then press or click the Edit button to 
modify the value. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
T/R Limit, spark or arc Recovery Ramp
(If slow ramp does not
Spark or arc reach a limit or spark.)
P Recovery Ramp Delay 
O
W Setback Slow
E Ramp
R (To limit or spark)
 
 Fast Ramp
 
 
 
 Quench
(Response to Spark)
T I M E
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
65
Spark Quench 
The Spark Quench screen allows you to select the quench period that will follow the detection of a 
spark. This selection may range from 1 to 9 full cycles. (Half cycles are not used in order to prevent 
applying pulsating DC to the TR Set.) The control default/safe setting is 1. 
 
• Press or click the Spark Quench option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 1 and 9, which represents the spark quench period. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Arc Quench 
The Arc Quench screen allows you to select the quench period that will follow the detection of an 
arc. This selection may range from 1 to 9 full cycles. (Half cycles are not used in order to prevent 
applying pulsating DC to the TR Set.) The control default/safe setting is 3. 
 
• Press or click the Arc Quench option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 1 and 9, which will represent the arc quench period. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Fast Ramp 
This screen allows you to set the duration of the fast ramp back to a selected set back level after a 
spark. The settings range from 1 half cycle to 9 half cycles. This ramp function begins at zero 
power after a spark, and provides for greater control of current recharge in the precipitator field. 
The default/safe setting is 6 half cycles. 
 
• Press or click the Fast Ramp option and then press or click the Edit button 
• Input a new value between 1 and 9, which will represent the fast ramp duration. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Spark Set Back 
This screen allows you to set the spark set back , or the percentage of the power level that the 
SQ-300i Hybrid will fast ramp to following the detection of a spark or arc, and the subsequent 
quench period. Once the control reaches the set back level, it will continue to ramp slowly until it 
reaches the level of the last spark or limit. Settings may range from 1% to 99% of the power level 
measured at the last spark or arc. The control default/safe setting is 25%. 
 
• Press or click the Spark Set Back option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 1 and 99, which will represent the spark set back percentage. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Spark Reaction 
This screen allows you to set the spark reaction , or how the control will react to sparks. Settings 
include quench and spit. The control default/safe setting is quench. If you select quench, the 
control will quench all sparks. If you select spit, the control will not perform a full quench on spit 
sparks; instead, the control will power down to the spit spark set back level. 
 
• Press or click the Spark Reaction option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click the Quench option to quench all sparks, or the Spit option to treat spit sparks 
differently. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
66
Spit Spark Set Back 
This screen allows you to program the Set Back percentage for a spit spark, when a quench period 
is not used. Valid settings range from 1% to 99% of the power level at spit spark. Following the 
detection of spit spark, the power level is immediately returned to the Spit Spark Set Back level. 
 
If the Spit Spark mode is on,the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase does not quench after a spit spark. 
Instead, it immediately lowers the power level and ramps up to the set back (selected in this 
screen), in 2 half cycles. If a spark re-strike occurs before reaching set back, a normal spark 
quench occurs. The control default/safe value is 25. 
 
• Press or click the Spit Spark Set Back option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Enter a number from 1 to 99, which represents the spit spark set back level. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Spark Mode 
This screen allows you to select either voltage or current for spark detection. The default/safe 
value is mA (secondary current). (See also, Principles of Operation, Overview.) 
 
• Press or click the Spark Mode option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click the KV option for secondary voltage or press or click the mA option for 
secondary current. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
OverSpark Alarm 
This screen allows you to turn the OverSpark Alarm on and off. When this setting is On, and the 
number of sparks per minute is equal to or greater than the OverSpark alarm setting, the SQ-300i 
Hybrid will generate an OverSpark alarm. The default/safe value is Off. 
 
• Press or click the OverSpark Alarm option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Press or click the Off option to turn the overspark alarm off, or press or click the On option 
to turn the overspark alarm on. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
OverSpark Alarm Limit 
This screen allows you to set the OverSpark Alarm Limit . When the OverSpark Alarm is on, an 
overspark alarm will occur if the number of sparks per minute is equal to or exceeds this setting 
This setting may range from 1 to 99 sparks per minute. The default/safe value is 30. 
 
• Press or click the OverSpark Alarm Setting option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 1 and 99. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Recovery Ramp Rate (No setting is required for this.) 
The recovery ramp rate is a built-in ramp rate that the control will initiate if other ramping does not 
result in a spark, arc, or limit. If the SQ-300i Hybrid reaches the level of the last spark without 
reaching a limit or a spark, the control will continue ramping at the slow ramp rate for the duration of 
the recovery ramp delay. At the end of this delay, if the control still has not encountered a limit or a 
spark, the SQ-300i Hybrid will switch to the recovery ramp rate. The recovery ramp rate increases 
the SCR firing angle at 0.15° per half cycle until a limit, spark, or arc occurs. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
67
Recovery Ramp Delay 
This screen allows you to set the duration of the recovery ramp delay that will occur if the slow 
ramp does not result in a limit or a spark. This setting may range from 0 (no delay) to 9 (the longest 
delay). The default/safe value is 5. 
 
The recovery ramp delay is determined by the spark rate setting and the setting you enter here. If 
you enter 0, there will be no delay. If you enter 5, and your spark rate setting is 30 sparks per 
minute, the delay will be 1 second. If you enter 9, and your spark rate setting is 30 sparks per 
minute, the delay will be 2 seconds. 
 
• Press or click the Recovery Ramp Delay Setting option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Smart Spark 
This setting is on allows the slow ramp rate to automaticly adjust if the previous spark occurs 
quicker than expected. For example, if the spark rate is set to 30 sparks per minute, a spark is 
expected to occur once every 2 seconds. The slow ramp rate is designed to go to spark level in 2 
seconds. If the spark occurs at 1.5 seconds instead of 2 seconds and Smart Spark is on. Then the 
slow ramp rate is designed to go to spark level in 2.5 seconds. 
 
Press or click the Smart Spark option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Select OFF or ON 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
• Press or click the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the Spark Response settings, 
or press or click the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups screen. 
 
 
Back Corona Settings 
� 
 
• If the JuiceCan Installed setting changes from “Not Installed” to 
“Installed,” the Back Corona Search feature will be disabled. You may 
still be able to change the back corona settings, but they will have no 
bearing on operation. 
 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase has five Back Corona Search settings at which you can adjust 
the Back Corona Search feature for each precipitator system. This feature is not active if Pulse 
Blocking is selected on, if KV feedback is unavailable, or if the search interval is set at zero. If the 
system has WinDAC, it can disable or hold the back corona search for a period of time, but the back 
corona settings will still be valid. 
 
How the Back Corona Search Works 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase measures the minimum, peak, and average value of the 
secondary voltage waveform. The minimum value is used to detect the presence of back corona, 
while the peak value is used in conjunction with the average secondary current to determine the 
most efficient operating point. The Back Corona Search feature is used to automatically find the 
most efficient operating setting, and to determine whether intermittent energization will improve 
operation, and if so, at what setting. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
68
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase detects Back Corona on a V-I curve when the minimum value of 
the secondary voltage decreases while secondary current increases. The SQ-300i Hybrid 
Single-Phase finds back corona by following a series of steps that test the operation of the 
precipitator; the control repeats these steps until the optimal operational setting is found. You can 
customize this series of steps by programming settings at each of the five Back Corona Search 
screens. 
 
The first back corona search begins at a point in time defined by the first Back Corona Search 
screen. The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase will run a series of partial V-I curves using the remaining 
Back Corona Search settings. For example, using the programmed setting for "starting full cycles 
off," the control begins to apply power. (Note that any "starting full cycles off" setting greater than 
zero is intermittent energization.) While ramping up, if the control detects a decrease in the 
minimum value of the secondary voltage and a corresponding increase in secondary current, the 
control has detected back corona. The control records the following data at this point: the SCR 
firing angle, pulse ratio, and the product of E2I, or [(KV Peak)2 x Average mA]. To continue the test, 
the control adds "1 full cycle off" to the previous "starting full cycles off" setting. Using the new 
setting, the control continues the V-I curve, ramping power up until it detects back corona again. 
 
This time, the control will record the same data as before, but it will then compare this back corona 
onset point to the first one. For each back corona onset point, the E2I formula produces a number 
that is proportional to the migration velocity (the speed at which particulate move toward the 
collecting plate). These results will form a trend; as the trend increases, (or as migration velocity 
increases), collection efficiency also increases. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase will continue to perform the Back Corona Search until the E2I 
formula produces a change in the increasing trend. At this point, the control will return to the last 
"good" setting(the last setting that produced an increase in collection efficiency); the control will 
continue to run at this setting, and will end the Back Corona Search until the next scheduled interval 
arrives. 
 
To edit the back corona search 
• Press or click the Back Corona Settings option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and 
press or click the OK button. The Edit screen for Back Corona will appear. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
69
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters and highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the valid range of values that 
may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this range, it will not be 
accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Back Corona parameters. 
 
Back Corona Search Time Interval 
This screen allows you to tell the control how often to perform the Back Corona Search. If the 
interval entered is 15 minutes, the search will begin every 15 minutes; if the interval entered is 1440 
minutes, the search will begin once every 24 hours. Typically, lower intervals are used for unstable 
processes, and higher intervals are used for stable processes. If any non-zero number is chosen, 
the Back Corona Search will start immediately after saving this setting. Be aware that when the 
control ramps down to the starting secondary current setting, opacity spikes may occur. The 
default/safe value is 0 (which disables the Back Corona Search). 
 
• Press or click the Back Corona Search Time Interval option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• To disable the search, enter 0. 
• To enable the search and set the search interval, input a new value between 5 and 1440. 
(If you enter a number between 1 and 5, the setting will be forced up to 5 minutes.) 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
You may edit 
any of these 
parameters 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
70
Back Corona Starting Pulse Ratio 
This screen allows you to enter the value which represents the number of full cycles off (of incoming 
line frequency), at which the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase will begin the back corona search. 
 
Available settings at this screen are 0 to 100. If 0 is chosen, power will be applied at every half 
cycle (full power). If any number from 1 to 100 is chosen, power will be off from 1 to 100 full cycles 
at a time (intermittent energization). The default/safe value is 0. 
 
� 
 
• To prevent the application of pulsating DC current to the TR Set, all 
"on" cycles are half cycles, and all "off" cycles are full cycles. This 
way, positive and negative energy are applied equally. 
 
 
• Press or click the Back Corona Starting Pulse Ratio option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Input a number from 0 to 100 to set the Starting Full Cycles Off. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Back Corona Ending Pulse Ratio 
This screen allows you to set a limit on the Back Corona Search. Unless told otherwise, the control 
will continue to search until it reaches back corona onset, or until it has tested at an intermittent 
energization level of 100 full cycles off. This ending pulse ratio setting enables you to avoid 
unwanted power off cycles. 
 
Available settings at this screen are 0 to 100. For example, if 6 is selected, the control will continue 
to search until it reaches 6 full cycles off, and then it will stop. The control default/safe setting is 1. 
 
• Press or click the Back Corona Ending Pulse Ratio option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 100 to set the maximum full cycles off. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
BC Search Minimum Sec Current 
This screen allows you to manually set the minimum current level at which the back corona 
algorithm will operate. For example, if the optimum operating point for the back corona search is 75 
mA, and this screen is programmed for 0100 mA, the control will operate at 100 mA. As a result of 
this setting, the control will operate the field at a higher power level than the back corona algorithm 
suggests. 
 
B&W recommends a minimum secondary current setting of 0025 mA. Be sure that the starting 
secondary current is always less than or equal to minimum secondary current. The default/safe 
setting is 25. 
 
• Press or click the BC Search Minimum Sec Current option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9999 representing the minimum secondary current level 
at which the back corona search will operate. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
BC Search Starting Sec Current 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
71
This screen allows you to set an arbitrary ramp down level. If for any reason you do not want the 
control to ramp down to zero at the beginning of each search, this setting will assure that. [If a 
remote limit is set to zero, then the starting secondary current setting is ignored and the SQ-300i 
Hybrid Single-Phase will operate at zero power (and it will not fire the SCRs).] 
 
B&W recommends a starting secondary current setting of no more than 0025 mA. The default/safe 
setting is 25. 
 
• Press or click the BC Search Starting Sec Current option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input a new value between 0 and 9999 which represents the secondary current level to 
which the control will ramp down at the beginning of each back corona search. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
• Press or click the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through all of the Back Corona 
Search settings, or press or click the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups 
screen. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pulse Blocking Settings 
� 
 
• If the Operating Limits screen for the JuiceCan changes from “Not 
Installed” to “Installed,” the Pulse Blocking feature will be disabled. 
You may still be able to change the pulse blocking settings, but they 
will have no bearing on operation. 
 
 
The SQ-300i has three settings for operating the Pulse Blocking (or intermittent energization) 
feature. This feature is used to stop the development of back corona and for energy savings. 
 
How Pulse Blocking Works 
The Pulse Blocking feature prevents pulsating DC from being applied to the TR Set, or the 
application of currents per half cycle in excess of the TR Set ratings. For example, if the precipitator 
system is operating at a current limit and Pulse blocking is selected on, the current feedback from 
the precipitator will decrease. This is because operation in this mode causes a decrease in the 
effective power levels in the precipitator. Due to the lower current feedback, conventional control 
systems would attempt to ramp up to current limit and apply too much current per half cycle, and 
this would damage the TR Set. 
 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase control's Pulse Blocking operation prevents the application of 
currents per half cycle in excess of the TR Set ratings by utilizing an SCR firing angle limit. During© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
72
operation with Pulse Blocking selected off, the SCR firing angle at primary current limit is read from 
the Main Status Display. This value is entered as the Pulse Blocking SCR firing angle limit. 
 
The preferred method to obtain the pulse blocking SCR firing angle limit is to short the secondary of 
the TR Set. This procedure provides the lowest possible secondary impedance the TR Set will ever 
see. Therefore, the SCR firing angle limit obtained will prevent the application of current per half 
cycle in excess of TR Set ratings. 
 
To prevent the application from pulsating DC current to the TR Set, all "on" cycles are half cycles, 
and all "off" cycles are full cycles. This way, positive and negative energy are applied equally. 
 
To edit the pulse blocking settings 
• Press or click the Pulse Blocking Settings option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Pulse Blocking will appear. 
 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the valid range of values that 
may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this range, it will not be 
accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Pulse Blocking parameters. 
 
You may edit 
any of these 
parameters 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
73
Firing Angle Limit in Pulse Blocking Mode 
This screen allows you to set the SCR firing angle limit to prevent the application of current per half 
cycle in excess of the TR Set ratings while operating in this mode. This is an additional limit, and all 
other limits remain active. Available settings range from 016 degrees to 180 degrees. The control 
default/safe setting is 90 degrees. 
 
• Press or click the SCR Firing Angle Limit option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input a value between 016° and 180° which represen ts the SCR Firing Angle Limit. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
PB Mode Full Cycles at Reduced Level 
This screen allows you to set the number of "full cycles at reduced power." Available settings range 
from 0 to 100. The control default/safe setting is 0. Pulse Blocking is turned on when any number 
other than 0 is entered under full cycles at reduced power. 
 
• Press or click the PB Mode Full Cycles @ Reduced Level option and then press or click 
the Edit button. 
• Input a value between 0 and 100 to set the number of full cycles at reduced power. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Pulse Blocking Reduced Power Level 
This screen allows you to set the number for "pulse blocked reduced power." Available settings 
range from 0 to 100. The control default/safe setting is 0. Pulse Blocking is turned on when any 
number other than 0 is entered under PB Reduced Power. An entry other than 0 represents the 
percentage of power reduction of full power. 
 
• Press or click the Pulse Blocking Reduced Power Level option and then press or click 
the Edit button. 
• Input a value between 0 and 100 to set the pulse block reduced power. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
• Press or click the up or down arrows to scroll through the Pulse Blocking settings, or press 
or click the Back button to return to the Configuration Groups page. 
 
 
Rapper Outputs (Optional) 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Control incorporates a Rapper Outputs feature that can be used with tumbling 
hammer type rappers. The rapper control feature requires additional hardware that is not included 
with the standard SQ-300i Hybrid. These optional modules can be ordered with the SQ-300i 
Hybrid, or may be used to upgrade your current control. 
 
The settings for the rapper control feature will determine when the rapper outputs will energize, how 
far the SQ-300i Hybrid will power down, and how long rapping will continue if the control is halted. 
Remember, at any time, control of the rapper outputs may be overridden by a remote computer. 
 
To rapp, the SQ-300i Hybrid will connect to four outputs. (Refer to your hardware documentation 
for specifications and capabilities.) The four rapper outputs operate independently of each other, 
and each SQ-300i Hybrid (with rapper outputs) controls rapping independently of other SQ-300i’s. 
The on and off settings at each output determine when and how long the output will rapp. When the 
SQ-300i Hybrid is started, each rapper output will delay rapping until the Off Period has expired. At 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
74
that time, the output starts rapping and continues until the On Period expires. This cycle repeats as 
long as the SQ-300i Hybrid is controlling rapping locally. 
 
Changes to the Rapper On and Off settings may be made at any time, however the changes will not 
take effect until the current active period expires. For example, Rapper 1 On period is the current 
active on period and is set to expire in 10 minutes. During this period, the On setting is modified to 
expire in 3 minutes. The change will not be implemented until the original setting expires, therefore 
it will take effect during the next cycle. 
 
If the SQ-300i Hybrid is configured with digital inputs, one of these digital inputs may be used as an 
external rapper input. (See also, Digital Inputs Usage Assignments.) This allows an external 
system (such as a PLC) to actually control rapping. In this case, two additional rapper control 
settings are available to establish limits that will be used during rapping: External Rapping 
Percentage and External Rapping Type. 
 
To edit the rapper outputs settings 
• Press or click the Rapper Outputs option from the Configuration Groups screen, and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Rapper Outputs will appear. 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll up through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
You may edit 
any of these 
parameters. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
75
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Rapper Outputs parameters. 
Rapper OFF Period (For Rapper Outputs 1-4) 
There are four Rapper OFF Time settings, one for each rapper output.This screen allows you to set the duration of the off time for the associated rapper output. During 
this off time, the rapper output remains de-energized. Valid entries range from 0 to 9999 minutes. 
If the off time is set to 0 minutes (and the on time is set to a non-zero number), this rapper output is 
manually turned on for continuous operation. 
 
• Press or click the Rapper OFF Period (for the desired output) and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Enter a setting from 0 to 9999 that will represent the Rapper OFF Period for the selected 
output. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Rapper ON Period (For Rapper Outputs 1-4) 
There are four Rapper ON Time settings, one for each rapper output. 
 
This screen allows you to set the duration of the on time for the associated rapper output. During 
this on time, the rapper output is energized and will run the rapper. Valid entries range from 0 to 
9999 seconds. If the on time is set to 0 seconds, this rapper output is manually turned off and will 
not run the rapper. 
 
• Press or click the Rapper ON Period (for the desired output) and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Enter a setting from 0 to 9999 that will represent the Rapper ON Period for the selected 
output. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Rapper Reduced Level (For Rapper Outputs 1-4) 
There are four Reduced Level settings, one for each rapper output. 
 
This screen allows you to set a power level limit for the SQ-300i Hybrid during locally-controlled 
rapping. This setting represents a percentage of the primary current limit and may range from 0 to 
100%. 
 
• Press or click the Rapper Reduced Level (for the desired output) and then press or click 
the Edit button. 
• Enter a setting from 0 to 100 that will represent the Reduced Power Rapp. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 
Rapper Run Time After SQ-300i is Halted 
This screen allows you to extend rapping for a defined period after the SQ-300i Hybrid is halted 
(manually, remotely, or from an alarm condition). Once the control is halted, the system will begin 
counting the defined period to extend the rapping. The system will continue rapping until the 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
76
Rapper Run Time extension period expires or the Rapper On period expires. Valid entries range 
from 0 to 9999 seconds. If this is set to 9999 seconds, the rapper outputs on this control will 
continue indefinitely. This setting applies to all four rapper outputs on this control. 
 
• Press or click the Rapper Run Time After SQ-300 i is Halted option and then press or 
click the Edit button. 
• Enter a setting from 0 to 9999 that will represent the Rapper Run Time extension period. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes.
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
77
External Reduced-Power Rapping Percentage 
This screen allows you to set a power level limit for the SQ-300i Hybrid during remote controlled 
rapping. This setting represents a percentage of the selected limit, and may range from 0 to 100%. 
(The “selected limit” is determined using the next Rapper Outputs setting.) 
 
• Press or click the External Reduced-Power Rapping Percentage option and then press 
or click the Edit button. 
• Enter a setting from 0 to 100 that will represent the level at which the selected parameter 
will be limited. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
External Reduced-Power Rapping Type 
This screen allows you to select the SQ-300i Hybrid parameter that will be limited during remote 
controlled rapping. Available selections are as follows: Rapping Disabled, Primary Current, 
Primary Voltage, Secondary Current, Secondary Peak KV Limit, Secondary Average KV Limit, KW 
Limit, and SCR Firing Angle Limit. (The actual limit is determined using the previous Rapper 
Outputs setting.) 
 
• Press or click the External Reduced-Power Rapping Type option and then press or click 
the Edit button. 
• Select the parameter that the control will limit on during remote controlled rapping. 
o To disable remote controlled rapping on this control, select Rapping Disabled. 
o To establish a limit, select any of the parameters (primary current, primary voltage, 
etc.). 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
78
Communication Settings 
The Communication Settings screen allows you to set the communications information for the 
SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller. 
 
� 
 
Although the Communications Settings screen displays the IP 
Address and Subnet Mask, you must use the SQDiscover program to 
change these. Please refer to the SQDiscover section for details. 
 
 
Edit Communication Settings 
• Press or click the Communication Settings option from the Configuration Groups screen and 
then press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and 
press or click the OK button. The Edit screen for Communication Settings will appear. 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters and highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
Most of these values are 
read-only. You may edit the 
SQ-300i Name, Expansion I/O 
Type, and Aux. Display Type. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
79
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Communications parameters. 
 
� 
 
• The IP Address should be set last , because once it is set you are no 
longer communicating with the current SQ Control and will not be able 
to make additional changes to this control. 
• B&W recommends that you consult with the plant IT department or 
network administrator before connecting any new device to the plant 
network. 
• The IT department or network administrator will need to assign any 
new IP addresses. 
 
 
IP Address 
(This field is Read-Only. You must use SQDiscover to change the IP Address.) To use the 
communications capabilities of the SQ-300i Hybrid, each SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller must 
have a unique IP address. Each SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller is shipped with a default/safe IP 
address of 192.168.1.2. If more than one Microcontroller will be connected to one Operator 
Interface, or if the Microcontroller will be connected to a network, this factory-set IP address must 
be changed. 
 
� 
 
• Use the SQDiscover program to change the IP Address. Please refer 
to the SQDiscover section for details. 
• When setting the IP address on the SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller for 
the first time, please refer to the Operator Interface section for 
important instructions on how to connect to the Microcontroller. 
 
 
• Each 3-digit numerical segment may range between 0 and 255, with the following restrictions. 
o The first 3-digit segment can’t have a value of 0 or 255. 
o The last 3-digit segment can’t have a value of 0, 127,128 or 255. 
o The newly entered IP address can’t currently exist on the network. 
 
Subnet Mask 
(This field is Read-Only. You must use SQDiscover to change the Subnet Mask.) The Subnet 
Mask identifies the network that the controls are installed on. Each 3-digit numerical segment may 
range between 0 and 255. Consult with the plant IT department or network administrator for this 
code. B&W recommends that the SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontrollers and Operator Interfaces be 
given their own subnet mask. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
80
SQ-300i Name 
The SQ-300i Name listed here is the ID assigned to the SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller. This ID is 
stored in the Microcontroller. This is the default control name and will be used for display purposes 
unless it is changed. To edit or change the SQ-300i Name: 
 
• Press or click the SQ-300i Name option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Enter the new Control ID. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
Interface and Control Version Numbers 
The Interface and Control version numbers are read-only fields. These values are provided so that 
you can confirm which firmware version is installed and may be needed for troubleshooting. 
 
The Interface and Control version numbers should always match. If they do not match, this may be 
an indication that the firmware did not install properly. Contact Support. 
 
Expansion I/O Type 
The SQ-300i Hybrid may be configured to work with several different types of I/O. These I/O types 
are optional hardware packages that allow the SQ-300i Hybrid to connect various analog and 
digital inputs and outputs for monitoring and control. Available I/O packages include Beckhoff, 
B&W, and Adam. (For information on how you can use these inputs and outputs, see Digital 
Inputs/Outputs and Analog Inputs/Outputs.) 
 
• Press or click the Expansion I/O Type option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Select the I/O Type. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
Auxiliary Display Type 
As an option to the full-size Operator Interface, a small Auxiliary Display may be used for basic 
monitoring and control at the cabinet. This setting tells the control whether the Auxiliary Display is 
installed. (Please refer to the Auxiliary Display section for details.) 
 
• Press or click the Aux. Display Type option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Select either the None or the Maple setting. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
81
Digital Outputs 
The Digital Outputs screen is used to identify the digital output signals made available through 
optional add-on hardware for the SQ-300i Hybrid. The assignments made here must correspond to 
the way the outputs are wired. (See hardware documentation for additional information.) 
 
To edit digital output settings 
• Press or click the Digital Outputs option from the Configuration Groups screen and then press 
or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Digital Outputs will appear. 
 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Press or click the setting which indicates how the output will be used. Possible assignments are 
as follows: 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
You may 
assign a 
specific usage 
to any of the 
available digital 
outputs. (This 
must match the 
way the output 
is wired.) 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
82
 
Digital Output Assignments 
Not Used 
Rapper Output 1 
Rapper Output 2 
Rapper Output 3 
Rapper Output 4 
Alarm Output 
Run Output 
Software Controlled 
Horn Output 1 
Horn Output 2 
Horn Output 3 
Horn Output 4 
Heater Output 1 
Heater Output 2 
Heater Output 3 
Heater Output 4 
Standby 
Contactor Control 
 
o Make sure that this assignment matches what the output is wired to. 
o If the output is not being used, select Not Used. 
o Use the Rapper Output assignments to control rapper outputs. 
o Use the Alarm Output assignment to send an "alarm" signal to an external device. 
o Use the Run Output assignment to send a "run" signal to an external device. 
o Use the Software Controlled assignment to add the output to the precipitator layout for 
manual control. 
o Use the Horn Output assignments to control horn outputs. (See also, Heater/Horn 
Settings.) 
o Use the Heater Output assignments to control heater outputs. (See also, Heater/Horn 
Settings.) 
o Use the Standby assignment to alert an external device that the Hybrid is in a halted 
condition (but main power is on and there is no alarm condition). This indicates that it 
is OK to turn the control on. 
o Contactor Control allow the SQ to directly control the main contactor. When the SQ is 
in a Run state the contactor will close, in a halted state the contactor will open 
 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Digital Outputs. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
83
 
Digital Inputs 
The Digital Inputs screen is used to identify the digital input signals made available through optional 
add-on hardware for the SQ-300i Hybrid. The assignments made here must correspond to the way 
the inputs are wired. (See hardware documentation for additional information.) 
 
To edit digital input settings 
• Press or click the Digital Inputs option from the Configuration Groups screen and then press or 
click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Digital Inputs will appear. 
 
 
 
• 
• Digital Inputs 1 – 12 are defined as the external digital inputs 
• External Enable is defined as the function for what use to be the fixed digirtal input for External 
Enable Open 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Press or click the setting which indicates how the input will be used. Possible assignments are 
as follows: 
You may assign 
a specific usage 
to any of the 
available digital 
inputs. (This 
must match the 
way the input is 
wired.) 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
84
 
Digital Input Assignments 
Not Used Breaker Trip* 
Rapper 1 Feedback Run/Halt Input* 
Rapper 2 Feedback Remote Trip Input* 
Rapper 3 Feedback Software Monitored Input 
Rapper 4 Feedback Remote Limit Input 1 
SCR Over Temperature* Remote Limit Input 2 
TR Over Temperature* Remote Limit Input 3 
TR Vacuum Pressure* Heater 1 Feedback 
Emergency Stop* Heater 2 Feedback 
TR Low Oil* Heater 3 Feedback 
Cubical Over Temperature* Heater 4 Feedback 
Boiler Trip* TR OverTemp Warning 
Hopper High* TR Vacuum Warning 
 Local Run/Halt Disable 
 
o Make sure that this assignment matches what the input is wired to. 
o If the input is not being used, select Not Used.o Use the Rapper Feedback assignments to obtain feedback from each of the 
corresponding rapper outputs. 
o Use the parameter assignments (SCR Over Temperature, TR Over Temperature, etc.) 
to program the SQ-300i Hybrid to respond to any of these special alarm conditions. 
o If a digital command is issued to the Run/Halt input, the command will be 
placed in the Run/Halt queue. 
o Use the Software Monitored Input assignment to add the input to the precipitator layout 
screen for display. 
o Use the Remote Limits Input 1-3 assignment if remote controlled input (from an 
external system such as a PLC, for example to be used for Power Off Rapping ) is 
needed. 
o Use the Heater Feedback assignments to monitor the operation of the heaters. (See 
also Heater/Horn Settings.) 
o Use either of the TR Warning assignments if you want a warning message to appear in 
Precipitator Manager or SQControl when the input turns on. 
o Use the Local Run/Halt Disable assignment if you want to prevent Run/Halt control at 
the Operator Interface. (If a communications loss or an alarm occurs, Run/Halt control 
at the Operator Interface will be enabled automatically.) 
o Use External Enable Input to use the inputas an external enable. If input is open then 
SCRs will ot fire. 
o 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Digital Inputs. 
 
* Each of the marked inputs has been assigned a Level 1 communications loss status. This means 
that if the SQ-300i Hybrid loses communication to the input, the control will halt, toggle the alarm 
relay, and display a Remote I/O Comm Alarm message. 
 
All of the remaining (unmarked) inputs and outputs are assigned a Level 2 communications loss 
status. In the event of a communications loss, the control will display a Remote I/O Comm Error 
message, but the control will continue to operate. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
85
 
Analog Outputs 
The Analog Outputs screen is used to identify the up to 16 analog output signals made available 
through optional add-on hardware for the SQ-300i Hybrid. The assignments made here must 
correspond to the way the outputs are wired. (See hardware documentation for additional 
information.) 
 
To edit analog outputs settings 
• Press or click the Analog Outputs option from the Configuration Groups screen and then press 
or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Analog Outputs will appear. 
 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Press or click the setting which indicates how the output will be used. Possible assignments are 
as follows: 
You may assign 
a specific usage 
to any of the 
available analog 
outputs. (This 
must match the 
way the output is 
wired.) 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
86
 
Analog Output Assignments 
Not Used 
Primary Current 
Primary Voltage 
Secondary Current 
Peak Secondary Current 
Minimum Secondary Current 
Secondary Voltage 
Peak Secondary Voltage 
Minimum Secondary Voltage 
Input Power 
Output Power 
Spark Rate 
Firing Angle 
Software Controlled 
 
o Make sure that this assignment matches what the output is wired to. 
o If the output is not being used, select Not Used. 
o Use the Parameter assignments (primary current, primary voltage, etc.) if you want to 
feed these values to an external system. 
o Use the Software Controlled Output assignment to add the output to the precipitator 
layout for manual control. (This functionality has not yet been implemented.) 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any changes. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Analog Outputs. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
87
 
Analog Inputs 
The Analog Inputs screen is used to identify the up to 8 analog input signals made available 
through optional add-on hardware for the SQ-300i Hybrid. The assignments made here must 
correspond to the way the inputs are wired. (See hardware documentation for additional 
information.) 
 
To edit analog inputs settings 
• Press or click the Analog Inputs option from the Configuration Groups screen and then press or 
click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Analog Inputs will appear. 
 
 
 
• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters to highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Press or click the setting which indicates how the input will be used. Possible assignments are 
as follows: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
You may assign a 
specific usage to 
any of the 
available analog 
inputs. (This 
must match the 
way the input is 
wired.) 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
88
 
Analog Input Assignments 
Not Used 
Opacity 
Remote Pri. Current 
Remote Pri. Voltage 
Remote Sec. Current 
Remote Peak Sec. Current 
Remote Min. Sec. Current 
Remote Sec. Voltage 
Remote Peak Sec. Voltage 
Remote Min. Sec. Voltage 
Remote Input Power 
Remote Output Power 
Remote Spark Rate 
Remote Firing Angle 
Software Monitored 
TC 1 Feedback 
TC 2 Feedback 
TC 3 Feedback 
TC 4 Feedback 
 
o Make sure that this assignment matches what the input is wired to. 
o If the input is not being used, select Not Used. This is the default. 
o Use the Opacity assignment to pull the opacity value into the system. 
o Use the Rmt. assignments if you want an external system to control the parameter 
(primary current, primary voltage, etc.). 
o Use the Software Monitored Input assignment to add the input to the precipitator layout 
screen for display. 
o Use the TC Feedback assignments to monitor the thermocouple inputs that will control 
the heaters, if applicable. (See also, Heater/Horn Settings.) 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any changes. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Analog Inputs. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
89
 
Heater/Horn Settings (Optional) 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Control incorporates additional control features that can be used with acoustic 
horns and heaters. These control features require additional hardware that is not included with the 
standard SQ-300i Hybrid. These optional modules may be used to upgrade your current control. 
 
The following Heater/Horn settings will determine how the horns and heaters will operate. 
 
To edit heater/horn settings 
• Press or click the Heater/Horn Settings option from the Configuration Groups screen and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Heater/Horn Settings will appear.• Press or click any parameter, or press or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button at the 
bottom of the screen to scroll through the list of available parameters and highlight/select an 
item. 
• Press or click the Edit button to edit the parameter. 
• Select a listed value or use the keypad to enter a new setting. (The screen may provide the 
valid range of values that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this 
range, it will not be accepted.) 
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
You may edit 
any of these 
parameters. 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
90
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
Use this method to enter settings for each of the Heater/Horn parameters. 
 
External Reduced-Remote Limit Percentage (For Remote Limirts 2 and 3) 
There are two External Reduced-Remote Limit Percentage settings, one for Remote Limit 2 and 
one for Remote Limit 3. 
 
This setting allows you to set a reduced limit for a user-selected parameter. This reduced limit will 
activate when the associated Remote Limit is active. This setting may range from 0-100%. (To 
select the parameter that will be limited, edit the External Reduced-Remote Limit Type setting.) 
 
• Press or click the External Reduced-Remote Limit Percentage (2 or 3) option and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
• Input the percent value in the spaces provided. This setting may range between 0 and 100. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
External Reduced-Remote Limit Type (For Remote Limits 2 and 3) 
There are two External Reduced-Remote Limit Type settings, one for Remote Limit 2 and one for 
Remote Limit 3. 
 
This setting allows you to define which parameter will be limited when the associated Remote Limit 
becomes active. Available selections include Disabled, Primary Current, Primary Voltage, 
Secondary Current, Secondary Peak Voltage, Secondary Avg. Voltage, KW Limit, and Firing Angle 
Limit. (To select the limit for this parameter, edit the External Reduced-Remote Limit Percentage 
setting.) 
 
• Press or click the External Reduced-Remote Limit Type (2 or 3) option and then press or 
click the Edit buttonPress or click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to scroll through the list 
of available parameters and highlight/select an item. 
• Press or click the OK button to make the selection. 
 
Heater OFF Level (For Heater Outputs 1 through 4) 
There are four Heater OFF Level settings, one for each of the four heater outputs. 
 
This setting allows you to set the point at which the heater will turn off. If the associated TC 
Feedback input is assigned, and the system indicates that the thermocouple reading is above the 
OFF setting, the heater will turn off. The OFF level setting may range from 0 to 100%. (If you enter 
an invalid setting, such as a setting less than or equal to the Heater ON Level, the heater will turn off 
or remain off.) 
 
• Press or click the Heater OFF Level (1, 2, 3 or 4) option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input the percent value in the space provided. This setting may range between 0 and 100. 
• Press or click the OK button to make the selection. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
91
Heater ON Level (For Heater Outputs 1 through 4) 
There are four Heater ON Level settings, one for each of the four heater outputs. 
 
This setting allows you to set the point at which the heater will turn on. If the associated TC 
Feedback input is assigned, and the system indicates that the thermocouple reading is below the 
ON setting, the heater will turn on. The ON level setting may range from 0 to 100%. (If you enter an 
invalid setting, such as a setting greater than or equal to the Heater OFF Level, the heater will turn 
off or remain off.) 
 
• Press or click the Heater ON Level (1, 2, 3 or 4) option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Input the percent value in the space provided. This setting may range between 0 and 100. 
• Press or click the OK button to make the selection. 
 
Horn OFF Period (For Horn Outputs 1 through 4) 
There are four Horn OFF Period settings, one for each of the four horn outputs. 
 
This setting allows you to set the duration of the off time for horn output. During this off time, the 
horn output remains de-energized. Valid entries range from 0 to 9999 minutes. If the off time is set 
to 0 minutes (and the on time is set to a non-zero number), this horn output will operate 
continuously. 
 
• Press or click the Horn OFF Period (1, 2, 3 or 4) option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Enter the number of minutes you want the horn to remain off. This setting may range between 
0 and 9999 minutes. 
• Press or click the OK button to make the selection. 
 
Horn ON Period (For Horn Outputs 1 through 4) 
There are four Horn ON Period settings, one for each of the four horn outputs. 
 
This setting allows you to set the duration of the on time for the horn output. During this on time, the 
horn output is energized and will sound the horn. Valid entries range from 0 to 9999 seconds. If the 
on time is set to 0 seconds, this horn output is turned off and will not sound the horn. 
 
• Press or click the Horn ON Period (1, 2, 3 or 4) option and then press or click the Edit button. 
• Enter the number of seconds you want the horn to remain on. This setting may range between 
0 and 9999 seconds. 
• Press or click the OK button to make the selection. 
 
Horn Reduced Level (For Horn Outputs 1 through 4) 
There are four Horn Reduced Level settings, one for each of the four horn outputs. 
 
This setting allows you to set a power level limit for the horn output. This setting represents a 
percentage of the primary current limit and may range from 00 to 100%. [If set to less than 100%, 
when the horn output switches to the ON state, a fixed timeout of 5 seconds will occur to give the 
control a chance to power down to this level. When the Horn ON Time ends, the control returns to 
normal operation (full power) immediately.] 
 
• Press or click the Horn Reduced Level (1, 2, 3, or 4) option and then press or click the Edit 
button. 
• Input the percent value in the space provided. This setting may range between 00 and 100. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the changes. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
92
Horn Run Time After SQ-300i is Halted 
This setting allows you to set the number of seconds that the horn outputs will remain on after the 
SQ-300i Hybrid is halted. This setting may range from 0 to 9999 seconds. A setting of zero will 
disable the horns when the control is halted. 
 
• Press or click the Horn Run Time After SQ-300 i is Halted option and then press or click the 
Edit button. 
• Enter the number of seconds you want the horn to remain on after the associated control is 
halted. This setting may range between 0 and 9999 seconds. 
• Press or click the OK button to make the selection. 
 
 
Aux Contact Output 
The Aux Contact Output screen is used to define the signal being used on the Auxiliary Output. 
The assignment made here must correspond to the way the output is wired. (See also, Control 
Connections and Digital Outputs.) 
To edit the definition 
• Press or click the Aux Contact Output option from the Configuration Groups screen and then 
press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Aux Contact Output will appear.• Press or click the Aux Contact Definition parameter, then press or click the Edit button to edit 
the parameter. 
 
 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
93
 
• Press or click the setting which indicates how the output will be used. Possible definitions are 
as follows: 
 
Aux Contact Definitions 
Not Used 
Rapper Output 1 
Rapper Output 2 
Rapper Output 3 
Rapper Output 4 
Alarm Output 
Run Output 
Software Controlled 
Horn Output 1 
Horn Output 2 
Horn Output 3 
Horn Output 4 
Heater Output 1 
Heater Output 2 
Heater Output 3 
Heater Output 4 
Standby Mode 
Contractor Control 
 
o Make sure that this definition matches what the output is wired to. 
o If the output is not being used, select Not Used. 
o Use the Rapper Output definitions to control rapper outputs. 
o Use the Alarm Output definition to send an "alarm" signal to an external device. 
o Use the Run Output definition to send a "run" signal to an external device. 
o Use the Software Controlled definition to add the output to the precipitator layout for 
manual control. 
o Use the Horn Output definitions to control horn outputs. (See also, Heater/Horn 
Settings.) 
o Use the Heater Output definitions to control heater outputs. (See also, Heater/Horn 
Settings.) 
o Use the Standby assignment to alert an external device that the Hybrid is in a halted 
condition (but main power is on and there is no alarm condition). This indicates that it 
is OK to turn the control on. 
o Contactor Control allow the SQ to directly control the main contactor. When the SQ is 
in a Run state the contactor will close, in a halted state the contactor will open 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
94
 
 
 
Reduced-Power Rapping 
The SQ-300i Hybrid and NWL PowerPlus™ controls may now be powered down via OPC and 
SQControl OPC Server during Power Off Rapping (POR). The external system determines when 
the control needs to power down, instructs an SQControl OPC Server tag to turn POR on, and 
SQControl determines how far the control will power down. (SQControl OPC Server’s POR tag is 
only available with SQControl versions 2.10.0.1 and later.) 
To edit the power down setting 
• Press or click the Reduced-Power Rapping option from the Configuration Groups screen and 
then press or click the Edit button. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the User Password and press or 
click the OK button. The Edit screen for Reduced Power Rapping will appear. 
 
 
 
(This setting is only used when POR is turned on using an external OPC tag. This setting does not 
apply to the SQ-300i’s optional rapper outputs.) 
 
• Press or click the Reduced-Power Rapping parameter, then press or click the Edit button to 
edit the parameter. 
• Use the keypad to enter a new setting. This sets the percentage that the control will power 
down to during POR when it is turned on via OPC. (The software displays a range of values 
that may be entered here. If you attempt to enter a number outside of this range, it will not be 
accepted.) 
o B&W controls may be set to power down between 0 to 100% of primary current limit. 
o NWL controls may be set to power down between 10 to 110% of output current limit. 
Use the Back button to 
return to the Configuration 
Groups screen 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
95
• Press or click Backspace to remove a number, 1 digit at a time. 
• Press or click OK to save a newly entered or modified value. 
• Press or click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving any modifications. 
 
 
 
Operating the Hybrid Single-Phase Controller 
Overview 
This section provides an overview of the operating screens and the status and alarm messages 
that may appear on the control. The display screens have been reproduced to help you become 
familiar with operating the control. 
 
Operate Screen Displays 
The SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase includes seven operating screens from which you can view the 
operation and check the status of the entire precipitator electrical system. Most of these display 
screens show the information numerically and graphically. 
 
When the control software initiates, the Operate screens are the first to appear. (If you are at one of 
the Functions screens, press or click the Operate button to access these screens.) Each Operate 
screen contains a Controls area, an Operational area, a Status area, and a Navigation area. 
 
The first operate screen is the main display. This screen displays the key precipitator operating 
values, as well as any limit or alarm messages. (For more information on these messages, refer to 
the Status and Alarm Messages section.) 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
96
 
 
 
Contents of the First Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded display 
only – See page 35) 
 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
97
 
Operational area 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Four virtual meters provide SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase operation 
information at a glance. Each meter shows the activity of one parameter. 
The meter needle advances and regresses as the parameter changes. 
The current value of the parameter, which is constantly changing, is 
displayed underneath the meter, the limit is displayed in the upper-right 
corner of the meter, and the alarm is displayed in the upper-left corner of 
the meter. (Limits for NWL PowerPlus™ controls are expressed as 
percentages.) The scale, on which the meter is based, is established 
when you enter Scaling settings. (See also, Programming the SQ-300i 
Hybrid Single-Phase.) 
 
• Primary Voltage: True RMS primary voltage is displayed as Volts AC, 
and is updated continuously. 
• Primary Current: True RMS primary current is displayed as Amps 
AC, and is updated continuously. 
• KV Average: Average secondary voltage is displayed as KV DC, and 
is updated continuously. 
• Secondary Current: Secondary current is displayed as mA DC, and is 
updated continuously. 
 
Beneath the meters, there are six other parameter readings: 
 
• Sparks Per Minute: The actual spark rate, in sparks per minute, 
updated once every minute. 
• SCR Firing Angle: The SCR firing angle is displayed in degrees, and 
is constantly updated. 
• Average Form Factor: The form factor is simply displayed as a 
number. The SQ-300i measures and displays Form Factor for 
troubleshooting, improvement of precipitator performance, and 
accurate sizing of the CLR. 
• KV Maximum: KV Max (KV Peak) is displayed in KV DC. This value 
is actively used with the Back Corona feature to detect the back 
corona onset point for each pulse blocking ratio, and to select the 
best pulse blocking ratio to eliminate back corona and provide peak 
collection. It is also actively used when secondary peak KV limit 
(listed under operating limits) is selected. 
• KV Minimum: KV Min is displayed in KV DC. This value is only 
actively used with the Back Corona feature to detect the back corona 
onset point for each pulse blocking ratio, and to select the best pulse 
blocking ratio to eliminate back corona and provide peak collection. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents of the First Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Operationalarea 
 
• Average Line Frequency: Average line frequency is displayed in 
Hertz, and is updated every half second. 
 
The line voltage source is used not only for power, but also for critical 
timing in firing the SCRs. An accurate determination of time relative 
to the line voltage supply is made to synchronize the firing of the 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
98
SCRs to this supply. In order to obtain this synchronization, the 
SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase produces a pulse each time the line 
voltage source crosses zero. 
 
Some equipment, such as adjustable speed drives, can distort the 
line voltage source and cause false zero crossings. This can create 
interference with the proper zero crossing detection. These problems 
are often intermittent and difficult to detect. Although the SQ-300i 
Hybrid Single-Phase has internal filtering to prevent this interference, 
this screen provides an additional troubleshooting tool to detect these 
problems which may be affecting other plant equipment. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
 
Status area 
 
 
 
 
The Status area of the screen displays the name of the current SQ-300i 
Hybrid Single-Phase control, the control status, and any status, limit, or 
alarm messages. 
 
 
Navigation area 
 
This area contains buttons used for navigation to other screens and 
controls. 
 
• The Functions/Operate button toggles the display between 
Functions mode and Operate mode. (While the display is in Operate 
mode, the button will read Functions which will return you to the 
SQ-300i Options screen.) 
• The Table View button allows you to view all of the controls in a list 
that includes key operating parameters for each. 
 
 
Navigation area 
(Operator interface 
– Not shown) 
 
• The Back and Next buttons will send the display to the previous or 
next control connected to this Interface (or computer, if applicable). 
• The Jump To button allows you to select a specific control. This is 
especially useful when there are many connected controls. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
99
 
 
Contents of the Second Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded display) 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
Operational area 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Two virtual meters provide SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase operation 
information at a glance. 
• Input Power: Input power is displayed in KVA, and is updated 
continuously. 
• Output Power: The real time rate of power usage is displayed in KW, 
and is updated continuously. 
Beneath the meters is a real time trend of SCR Firing Angle. This 3.5 
minute trend updates continuously, providing insight to any trends that 
may be developing. The y-scale displayed on the trend is determined by 
the control type. The Single-Phase scale is16-180. (The control will use 
this real time data to create the 6-minute averages used by the Trending 
feature.) 
• SCR Firing Angle: The SCR firing angle is displayed in degrees, and 
is constantly updated. 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
Status area Displays the current control and any status, limit, or alarm messages. 
Navigation area Displays buttons used to select other control features (or controls). 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
100
 
 
 
Contents of the Third Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded display) 
 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
Operational area 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Two real time trends provide SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase operation 
information at a glance. 
 
• Secondary Current: Secondary current is displayed as mA DC, and is 
updated continuously. 
• KV Average: Average secondary voltage is displayed as KV DC, and 
is updated continuously. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
Status area Displays the current control and any status, limit, or alarm messages. 
Navigation area Displays buttons used to select other control features (or controls). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
101
 
 
 
 
Conten ts of the Fourth Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded display) 
 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
Operational area 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Three real time trends provide SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase operation 
information at a glance. 
 
• KV Maximum: KV Max (KV Peak) is displayed in KV DC. 
• KV Average: Average secondary voltage is displayed as KV DC. 
• KV Minimum: KV Min is displayed in KV DC. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
Status area Displays the current control and any status, limit, or alarm messages. 
Navigation area Displays buttons used to select other control features (or controls). 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
102
 
 
 
 
Contents of the Fifth Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded 
display) 
 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
Operational area 
(Spark, Arc or 
Limit Values) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This screen captures a snapshot of key measurements each time a 
Spark, Arc or Limit occurs. This information may be useful in trouble 
shooting. 
 
• Primary Current: Represents the measurement when a Spark, Arc or 
Limit occurs. 
• Primary Voltage: Represents the measurement when a Spark, Arc or 
Limit occurs. 
• Secondary Current: Represents the measurement when a Spark, Arc 
or Limit occurs. 
• KV Average: Represents the measurement when a Spark, Arc or 
Limit occurs. 
• SCR Firing Angle: Represents the measurement when a Spark, Arc 
or Limit occurs. 
• Output Power: Real time rate of power usage in kilowatts. 
• Sparks Per Minute: Represents the actual spark rate. Updates occur 
once every minute. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
103
 
 
Contents of the Fifth Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Operational area 
(Spark, Arc or 
Limit Values) 
 
• Peak/Average KV: Measure of secondary KV Peak to secondary KV 
Average (max divided by average) 
• Average/Minimum KV: Measure of secondary KV Average to 
secondary KV Minimum (average divided by minimum) 
• Manual Pot Input: The manual pot input is used to override the 
user-programmed primary current limit setting to a lower setting, and 
thereby, provide remote or manual control. 
• Avg. Line Frequency: Represents the measurement over the past 
quarter of a second. 
• Max. Line Frequency: Represents the measurement over the past 
quarter of a second. 
• Min. Line Frequency: Represents the measurement over the past 
quarter of a second. 
• Waveform Distortion mA Loss: Represents the percentage of 
secondary current lost due to the shape of the secondary wave form. 
• TR Set Rated Form Factor: This rating is an indication of the primary 
circuit's ability to maintain a near sinusoidal waveform on the 
primary. 
• Actual Average Form Factor: The form factor measurement is used 
for troubleshooting, improvement of precipitator performance, and 
accurate sizing of the CLR. 
• TR Set Rated Fractional Conduction: Represents the fractional 
conduction expected for the rated form factor. 
• Actual Fractional Conduction: Representsthe measurement of the 
shape and duration of the secondary current pulse relative to the 
maximum time period possible. 
• Conduction Percentage: Represents a percentage calculation based 
on firing angle. (100% conduction is reached at a firing angle of 16°. 
0% conduction will register at a firing angle of 180°.) 
• Back Corona (BC) Search Mode: Displays the current mode (BC 
search is not active, BC search is pending, or BC search is in 
progress). 
• BC Minutes Until Search: Number of minutes until the next BC 
search begins 
• BC Pulse Blocking Ratio: Represents the number of full cycles off. 
• BC Firing Angle: Represents the measurement for optimum 
collection. 
• BC Limit: A value of 1 will indicate the control is at a back corona limit. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
104
 
Contents of the Fifth Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Operational area 
(Other Values) 
 
 
• Line Voltage RMS: Represents the measurement taken each time 
the control is read. 
• Sec. Impedance: Represents the calculated impedance on the 
secondary side of the transformer. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
 
Operational area 
(Operating Times) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Operating Times area provides specific elapsed times for the 
SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase and the TR set. 
 
• Since AVC Reset: The amount of time since power was applied to 
the control this time. This may be reset upon power up or a full reset. 
• Total Power-On: The amount of time the control has been powered 
up since install. 
• Since TR Set Run: The amount of time since the Run button was 
pushed. 
• Total TR Set On: The total amount of time the TR set has had power 
applied to it. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
Operational area 
(Firmware 
Information) 
 
• Control Type: This represents the type of control in use which may 
include Standard 600V, 3-phase 600V, Single-phase 750V, SQi 
Hybrid 3-Phase, SQi Hybrid Single-Phase Conventional, and 
Simulator. 
• Interface/Control Versions: The Interface and Control version 
numbers are provided so that you can confirm which firmware 
version is installed (which may be needed for troubleshooting). 
 
The Interface and Control version numbers should always match. If 
they do not match, this may be an indication that the firmware did not 
install properly. You may use the SQProgram.exe to remedy this. 
The SQProgram.exe file is shipped with the Master Installer (which 
will typically install it in the following folder: C:\Program Files\BW 
PGG\Utils). 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
Status area Displays the current control and any status, limit, or alarm messages. 
Navigation area Displays buttons used to select other control features (or controls). 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
105
 
 
 
If no inputs or outputs have been defined, the control will not display this screen. 
 
Contents of the Sixth Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -Phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded display) 
 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
Operational area 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
• Digital Outputs: Displays the On/Off status for each of the digital 
outputs in use. 
• Digital Inputs: Displays the On/Off status for each of the digital inputs 
in use. 
• Analog Outputs: Displays the readings for each of the analog outputs 
in use. (Provides percent of scale and maximum scale.) 
• Analog Inputs: Displays the readings for each of the analog inputs in 
use. 
• Aux Contactor: Displays the On/Off status for the Aux Contactor (if in 
use). 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
 
Status area 
 
Displays the current control and any status, limit, or alarm messages. 
 
Navigation area 
 
Displays buttons used to select other control features (or controls). 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
106
 
 
 
• Be aware that the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase honors the last digital 
input command (whether it is sent by the control itself or from a remote 
system or computer). 
 
If you are controlling the digital inputs from a remote system like a 
PLC, the digital input on your end may not reflect the current status. 
(In other words, while a PLC may display the last command that it 
sent, the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase may have received a more 
recent, alternate command.) 
 
Sachez que le SQ-300i dispose de la dernière commande d'entrée 
numérique (qu'elle soit envoyée par le contrôleur lui-même, par un 
système à distance ou un ordinateur). 
 
Si vous commandez les entrées numériques avec un système distant 
comme un automate (PLC), l'entrée numérique de votre côté ne 
reflète pas l'état actuel. (En d'autres termes, même si un PLC peut 
afficher la dernière commande qu'il a envoyé, le SQ-300i peut avoir 
reçu une commande alternative plus récente.) 
 
Recuerde que el SQ-300i obedece el último comando de entrada 
digital, ya sea que se envíe desde el control mismo o desde un 
sistema u ordenador remoto. 
 
Si usted está controlando las entradas digitales desde un sistema 
remoto como un PLC, es posible que la entrada digital que usted vea 
no refleje el estado actual. (En otras palabras, aunque un PLC pueda 
mostrar el último comando que envió, el SQ-300i puede haber 
recibido un comando alternativo más reciente). 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
107
 
 
 
If no rapper, heater or horn outputs have been defined, the control will not display this screen. 
 
Contents of the Seventh Operate Screen (Hybrid Single -phase) 
 
Controls area 
(Expanded display) 
 
 
Lists all of the connected controls that you may select for viewing. 
 
 
Operational area 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
• Rapper Outputs: Displays the status (On/Off) of the rapper outputs, 
as well as the countdown timer for each. (These timers indicate how 
much time remains before the output changes states.) 
• Horn Outputs: Displays the status (On/Off) of the horn outputs, as 
well as the countdown timer for each. (These timers indicate how 
much time remains before the output changes states.) 
• Heater Outputs: Displays the status (On/Off) of the heater outputs 
and the status of the feedback for each of the heaters. 
• Line Voltage Pulse Length (Pos): Displays the time in useconds of 
the length of the positive side of the Line Voltage 
• Line Voltage Pulse Length (Neg): Displays the time in useconds of 
the length of the negative side of the Line Voltage 
• Line Voltage Pulse Span (Pos): Displays the time in useconds 
between two positive sides of the line voltage 
• Line Voltage Pulse Span (Neg): Displays the time in usconds 
between two negative sides of the line voltage 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
108
• Line Voltage Jitter: Displays the difference between the length of the 
positive and negative pulse of the line voltage in useconds 
• Line Voltage Jitter Side: Displays the side with the shortest pulse 
length. 
 
• Touch the screen anywhere in the Operational area to advance to the 
next Operate screen. 
 
 
Status area 
 
Displays the current control and any status, limit, or alarm messages. 
 
Navigation area 
 
Displays buttons used to select other control features (or controls). 
 
 
 
 
Status And Alarm Messages 
The status area of each Operatescreen includes a message field that will display one of over 20 
status and alarm messages. 
 
Messages will appear according to the following priority list: 
1. Alarms 
2. Sparks/Arcs 
3. Operating Limits (i.e., Secondary Current Limit, etc.) 
 
Each message remains on the screen until its condition is cleared or it is overridden by a higher 
priority message. For example, status messages such as Spark or Arc appear at their occurrence 
and stay on, unless overridden by an Alarm. Either of these messages would override a limit 
message (such as Primary Current Limit). Alarm messages remain on the display until the alarm is 
cleared. 
 
• To clear an alarm, press or click the red Halt button on the Options (Function) screen and then 
press or click the green Run button to restart the control. 
• For a detailed look at alarm history, please refer to the Alarms section. 
 
Status and Alarm List 
The following is a list of messages that may appear on the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase Operate 
screens. (The Main Power Off alarm is explained in detail following this roster.) 
 
Message Message Description 
Arc Shown during arcs through the quench period. 
Arc Quench Shown during arcs through the quench period. 
(The message may appear briefly and not be 
seen.) 
Commutation Limit Displayed when the SQ-300i Hybrid does not 
provide enough off time for the SCRs. 
External Enable Open Displayed if the external enable input is open which 
disables SCR firing and control operation. This 
message remains displayed until 5 volts are 
applied to this input. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
109
Firing Angle Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. An SCR firing 
angle limit of 30 degrees is preset in the SQ-300i 
Hybrid controller. 
Firing Angle Limit (Pulse-Block) Displayed when this limit is reached. When 
operating in the Pulse Blocking Mode, a higher 
SCR firing angle limit can be set. 
Halt Indicates main power is on, but control operation 
has been stopped. 
Hz Mismatch Displayed when the measured and defined 
frequency differ. 
Imbalance Alarm Indicates one of two things: (1) an SCR has been 
lost or (2) a phase has been lost. 
 Main Power Off Displayed to alert you to the loss of main line power 
due to an open contactor or blown SCR fuse. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
110
 
Message Message Description 
Manual Limit Displayed if the analog input has overridden the 
primary current limit to a lower value. 
OverSpark Alarm Displayed if the OverSpark alarm feature is on and 
the number of sparks per minute exceeds the 
OverSpark alarm setting. 
Internal Hardware Error Displayed when the control detects a fault in the 
hardware that can cause the timing of the SCRs to 
be incorrect. Can also displayed is there is too 
much noise or faulting connections on the Power 
Lines 
Primary Current Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Primary Overcurrent Alarm Displayed if the measured primary current exceeds 
its set limit. 
Primary Undervoltage Alarm Displayed if the measured primary voltage falls 
below its set limit. 
Primary Voltage Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Pulse Block Displayed when Pulse Blocking is active. 
Remote Firing Angle Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Remote I/O Comm Alarm Displayed when the control cannot communicate to 
I/O that is both defined and is assigned a Level 1 
Comm Loss status. (Control will alarm and halt.) 
Remote I/O Comm Error Displayed when the control cannot communicate to 
I/O that is both defined and is assigned a Level 2 
Comm Loss status. (Control will continue to run.) 
Remote KW Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Remote Primary Current Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Remote Primary Voltage Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Remote Secondary Current Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Remote Secondary Voltage Average 
Limit 
Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Remote Secondary Voltage Peak Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Secondary Current Limit Displayed when this limit is reached. 
Secondary Overcurrent Alarm Displayed if the measured secondary current 
exceeds its set limit. 
Secondary Undervoltage Alarm Displayed if KV feedback is selected, and 
secondary voltage falls below its set limit. 
Secondary Voltage Average Limit Shown only when KV feedback is selected and this 
limit is reached. 
Secondary Voltage Peak Limit Shown only when this limit type is selected, when 
KV feedback is selected and this limit is reached. 
Spark Displayed at every spark. 
Spark Quench Displayed during the spark quench period. (The 
message may appear briefly and not be seen.) 
Spit Spark Displayed at every spit spark. 
 
Main Power Off Alarm 
This feature detects the loss of main line power due to an open contactor or blown SCR fuse. 
When the main line power is not detected, the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase will halt all operation, 
and the *Main Power Off* message is displayed. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
111
When main line power is restored, SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase operation is enabled and will 
return to normal operation based on the control's settings. It is not necessary to re-enter any of the 
operating, alarm, or TR Set sizing values. These settings are stored in a non-volatile random 
access memory (NOVRAM) and cannot be erased due to loss of control power. 
 
In the event of a Main Power Off Alarm, there will be no change of state of the solid state alarm 
relay outputs. In addition, this feature also provides for the standard interfacing of the SQ-300i 
Hybrid Single-Phase to standard electrical systems that can use a contactor to start and stop 
control operation. 
 
 
Table View 
The status area of each Operate screen includes a button that allows you to switch to the Table 
View. The B&W Conv. tab allows you to view all of the B&W Single-phase controls in a list (rather 
than one control at a time). This list will update the status and readings for each SQ-300i Hybrid 
Single-Phase controller about once every two seconds. Additional Table View tabs will appear if 
you have added SQ-300i 3-phase controls, NWL controls or OPC I/O. 
 
To access the Table View 
• Press or click the Table View button on any Operate screen, the Options screen, or the System 
Settings screen. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
112
Contents of the Table View (Hybrid Single -phase) 
 
Table • Name: Lists all of the connected controls. 
• Status: Displays the status of the control. If the SQ-300i Hybrid 
Single-Phase control is halted, has an alarm, or is not 
communicating, the Status column will be red. (Otherwise, the 
Status will be green.) 
• Parameters: Displays all of the key operating parameters. 
 
Navigation area 
 
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll up and down through the list of 
controls, and right and left through all of the available parameters. 
• Press the Hold Display button to freeze the table display for 30 
seconds (giving you a chance to record readings, if needed.) Press 
the Display Held button to extend the freeze for another 30 seconds. 
• Press or click the Back button to return to the previous screen. 
 
Save Table • Press or click the Save To File button to save the contents of the 
Table View to a .CSV file. You can then open this file in another 
application (like a spreadsheet program). 
 
To change the order of the controls in the list 
• Go to Manage Controls and Re-order the controls. 
 
To access the other control tabs 
• Press or click the B&W Conv. Tab to view the SQ-300i conventional (single-phase)controls. 
• Press or click the B&W 3-Phase tab to view the SQ-300i 3-Phase controls. This tab is generally 
the same as the B&W Conv. tab, but will display some different parameters. 
• Press or click the NWL PowerPlus tab to view NWL PowerPlus™ controls. This tab is generally 
the same as the B&W Conv. tab, but will display different control information. 
 
To access the External I/O Table View tab 
• Press or click the External I/O tab. 
 
 
 
Conte nts of the External I/O Table View Tab 
 
Table • Item: Lists the entry name of each of the I/O items. 
• Tag: List the tag name of the I/O item. 
• Value: Displays the value being read for the input or output. 
• Quality: Displays an indication (good or bad) of how much you can 
depend on the information being provided. 
• Last Update: Displays last time the item was read. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
113
SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase Functions 
Overview 
There are several tools that are available at each control which help with troubleshooting and data 
analysis. All of these are accessed using the Options screen. 
 
To access the Options screen 
• Press or click the Functions button from any of the Operate screens. 
• Or, press or click the Control Settings button from the System Settings screen. 
 
 
 
For details on working with the Options screen, please refer back to the SQ-300i Options Screen 
section earlier in the manual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
114
 
Trending 
The Trending function allows the SQ-300i Hybrid to graph various parameters and display them. 
 
To access the Trending function 
• First, select a control (from the Controls Area of any Operate screen, the Options screen, or the 
System Settings screen). 
• Press or click the Trending button on the Options screen. The Trending screen will appear. 
 
Buttons allow 
you to add or 
remove trends 
There is a scale 
for each trend 
displayed 
A movable 
cursor line 
pinpoints values 
These buttons 
shift the display 
by days 
These buttons 
move the cursor 
line 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
115
Initially, when the Trending screen appears, trending for the current day will display (whether there 
is any captured data or not). There will be no data values displaying with the buttons across the top 
of the screen. Once you have captured data and you attempt to move the blue cursor line, the 
corresponding data values for each of the variables will display with the buttons across the top of 
the screen. 
 
The control will store up to 1 year of data. Once the control accumulates 1 year of data, it will purge 
old data each day. 
 
 
Working With the Trending Screen 
 
Select parameters 
 
• Press or click any button at the top of the graph to display (or remove) 
the parameter, its measurement, and its trend from the screen. 
• If you need to select other parameters, use the Setup feature. 
 
 
Navigate trending 
data 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The trend screen will always display one day of trending data. 
 
• Press or click the leftmost set of single arrow buttons to shift the 
entire viewing area of the graph forward or backward by one day. (If 
you click and hold the arrow, the viewing area will shift quickly.) 
• Use the double arrow buttons to shift the entire viewing area of the 
graph forward or backward by 5 days. (If you click and hold the 
arrow, the viewing area will shift quickly.) 
• Press or click the Back button to return to the SQ-300i Settings 
screen. 
 
Vertical cursor 
line 
• Press or click the rightmost set of single arrow buttons to shift the 
blue cursor line forward or backward in 6 minute intervals. (If you 
click and hold the arrow or the cursor line, the cursor line will move 
quickly.) 
The position of the cursor line determines which data points will be 
displayed with the buttons at the top of the screen. If you want to 
examine a specific portion of the trend, move the cursor line to that 
position. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
116
To access the trend setup feature 
• Press or click the Setup button at the 
bottom of the screen. 
 
 
• Press or click any of the six drop-down lists 
to select a new parameter for the trend 
display. 
• Press the OK button to save changes and 
return to the trend screen. 
• Press the Cancel button to return to the 
trend screen without saving changes. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
To access the snapshot feature 
• Press or click the Snapshot button at the bottom of the screen. The software will take a picture 
of the trend screen and prompt you to save it as a .BMP file. 
 
 
• The software will automatically select a file location and a filename for the snapshot. You may 
use these recommended settings or use the keyboard to enter your own. 
• Press the OK button to save the snapshot, or press the Cancel button to return to the trend 
screen without saving. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
117
Scope 
The on-board Scope feature supplies you with a safer way to capture and view waveforms. The 
on-board Scope comes with scaling options, waveform navigation, the ability to save and load 
waveforms, and a trigger menu (just like an oscilloscope). Once the waveforms have been 
captured, they can be used for verifying proper operation and troubleshooting. 
 
To access the Scope function 
• First, select a control (from the Controls Area of any Operate screen, the Options screen, or the 
System Settings screen). 
• Press or click the Scope button on the Options screen. The Scope screen will appear. 
 
 
 
Working With the Scope Screen 
 
Load and Save 
Scope Traces 
 
• To capture a new waveform, first press or click the Trigger button to 
open the Trigger window. 
• Select the appropriate trigger to determine when, and at what event, 
the control will capture a waveform for the display. Available triggers 
include the following: 
o Free Run (which is an immediate capture) 
o Zero Crossing (when line voltage crosses zero) 
o Spark (when a spark occurs) 
o Fire SCR (when the SQ is instructed to fire the SCR) 
 
 
 
 
 
Select waveforms for 
display. 
Vertical cursor line 
Highlighted waveform 
Load and save 
scope traces. 
Capture info 
Adjust scaling 
and cursor line. 
Use trigger and 
traces to set 
your capture 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
118
 
Working With the Scope Screen 
 
 
Load and Save 
Scope Traces 
 
• Next, select the Offset; this sets the number of half cycles before 
(negative trigger value) or after (positive trigger value) the trigger 
event that the control will start reporting data back. For example, to 
display the curve 2 half cycles before a spark, select "Spark” as the 
trigger and “-2” as the offset. The resulting waveform will show 2 half 
cycles before and 8 half cycles after the spark. (All waveforms 
display 5 full cycles.) Press or click OK to enter the trigger settings. 
 
• Then press or click the Capture From Control button to populate the 
graph based on your settings. 
• To load a previously saved waveform, press or click the Load From 
File button. 
 
• To save the waveform to a file, press or click the Save To File button. 
• To save the waveform to memory, press or click the Save To 
Memory button. 
• To alternate between the captured waveform and one saved to 
memory, press or click the Swap Capture/Memory button. 
 
 
Display and 
Highlight 
 
 
 
 
 
 
• The X axis represents the mSec measurement(located across the 
bottom of the graph). It identifies the point that the blue vertical 
cursor line crosses the active parameter. 
• The Y axis represents the parameter measurement associated with 
the active waveform. 
 
The buttons that display down the right side of the graph, allow you to 
specify which traces (up to 5) will appear in the graph and which one will 
be the active line. (Remember: You can only display the traces that have 
been captured.) The font color on the Display button corresponds to the 
data line of the same color. 
 
• Press or click any of the Display buttons to add (or remove) the 
waveform from the display. 
• Press or click one of the Highlight buttons to designate one of the 
displayed waveforms as the active waveform. 
o The active waveform will appear bolded. 
o The scale on the Y-axis will follow the active waveform. 
o The cursor line will pinpoint values for the active waveform. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
119
 
Scaling and 
Cursor Line 
 
The Scope feature includes some tools that allow you to manipulate the 
display and focus on the data that is important to you. 
 
• Press or click the mV or V Range button to adjust the scale of the 
y-axis for the active waveform. (As you press mV, the range of the 
scale gets smaller, and the waveform gets larger. As you press V, 
the range of the scale gets larger, and the waveform gets smaller.) 
• Press or click the mS or nS Time buttons to move the active line 
towards milliseconds or nano seconds. (As you press mS, the length 
of the waveform compresses. As you press nS, the waveform 
expands lengthwise.) 
• Press or click and drag the Y-axis scale to move it up and down. 
(This allows you to adjust your view of the active waveform, while not 
moving the other waveforms.) 
 
The Scope also features a blue, vertical cursor line that you may use to 
pinpoint the data values that correspond to the active waveform. As you 
move the cursor line from left to right, the software will display the x and y 
data values for the point at which the waveform and the cursor line 
intersect. 
 
• Press or click the Move Left or Move Right Arrows to move the 
cursor line to the left or right. 
• You may also press or click and drag the cursor line to move it back 
and forth. 
 
 
Exit 
 
• Press or click the Back button to return to the Options screen. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
120
Sample Waveforms 
The following waveforms were obtained from an original SQ-300® AVC control using an 
oscilloscope. These are representative of the type of data you will be able to obtain using the 
Scope feature on the new SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase control. Reference these waveforms 
when troubleshooting. 
 
Primary Current and Secondary Current 
Using a Two-channel Oscilloscope: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The primary current AC waveform is rectified to DC current on the secondary with no missing or 
abnormal half-cycles. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
121
Waveform Indicating Spark Response: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Proper spark response indicated on the secondary current waveform. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Normal secondary current and voltage waveforms. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
122
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Normal spark response - secondary current and secondary voltage waveforms. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Spit spark response - secondary current and secondary voltage waveforms. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
123
VI Curves 
The VI Curves screen is a troubleshooting tool that is used to diagnose the “health” of a precipitator 
field for the selected control. It allows you to graphically display the relationship between 
precipitator voltage (KV) and precipitator current (mA). The secondary voltage is plotted along the 
horizontal axis, and the secondary current, along the vertical axis. 
 
To access the V-I Curves feature 
• First, select a control (from the Controls Area of any Operate screen, the Options screen, or the 
System Settings screen). 
• Press or click the V-I Curves button on the Options screen. If the system has been logged off, 
you will be required to input the User Password and press or click the OK button. 
• The V-I Curves dialog will appear. 
 
 
 
Working With the V-I Curves Screen 
 
Run V-I Curve 
 
• Press or click the Start Angle field; when the edit screen displays, 
enter a new value between 16 and 180. (This represents the SCR 
Firing Angle at which the curve will start.) Then press or click OK. 
• Press or click the End Angle field; when the edit screen displays, 
enter a new value between 16 and 180. (This number represents the 
point at which the curve will end, unless it is stopped by a spark, arc, 
limit, or a timeout.) Then press or click the OK button. (Note: The 
Start Angle must be greater than the End Angle.) 
A movable 
cursor line 
pinpoints values 
Curve 
generation info 
These 
buttons 
move the 
cursor 
These buttons 
add and remove 
portions of the 
curve for display. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
124
 
Working With the V-I Curves Screen 
 
Run V-I Curve 
 
• Press or click the Step field; when the edit screen displays, enter a 
new value between 2 and 10. (Steps represent the degree changes 
in the firing angle which occur between data points.) Then press or 
click the OK button. 
• Press or click the Start button and the application will begin 
populating the graph based on the input. 
 
The control will begin to run the VI Curve after a short delay. As each 
data point is evaluated, it will display on the graph. The curve will 
continue to generate until it reaches the End Angle, or until a spark, 
arc, limit, or timeout occurs. 
 
Saving and 
Loading Curves 
• Press or click the Snapshot button to save a .BMP of the V-I curve 
display. (This works the same as the Trending snapshot.) 
• Press or click the Save To File Button to save the V-I curve to a file. 
(The software will save the file in both VIC and CSV file types.) 
• Press or click the Load From File button to open a previously saved 
V-I curve. 
 
RC Test The RC Test is a tool that you may need to use at some point to easily 
produce calculated resistance and capacitance values for your control. 
 
• Press or click the Run RC Test button to start the test. 
 
When selected, the control will run an internal test (which should only 
take a couple of seconds). When the test is complete, SQControl will 
display a popup window that provides calculated resistance and 
capacitance values. 
 
You may want to run this test before and after making mechanical repairs 
to see if there is a significant change in these parameters (which may 
indicate a problem such as a close clearance, broken electrode, bad 
ground, etc.). 
 
View Options Each of the three buttons located at the bottom of the screen (KV 
Minimum, KV Average and KV Maximum), correspond to the line of the 
same color that has been drawn on the graph. 
 
• Press or click any of those three buttons to remove or re-add that 
particular curve to the display. 
 
The V-I Curves screen also features a blue, horizontal cursor line that 
you may use to pinpoint the data values that correspond to all three parts 
of the curve. As you move the cursor lineup and down, the software will 
display all of the x and y data values for the points at which the curves 
and the cursor line intersect. 
 
• Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the cursor line up the 
curve to the next data point, or down the curve to the next data point. 
• You may also click and drag the cursor line to move it back and forth. 
 
Exit • Press or click the Back button to return to the Options screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
125
 
Energy Management 
The Energy Management feature allows you to enable or disable Energy Management at each 
SQ-300i Hybrid control and permits an Energy Management setting for each. This setting 
represents a limit at which the control will supply power. This allows for more conservative power 
use when operating conditions permit it. 
 
To access the Energy Management feature 
• First, select a control (from the Controls Area of any Operate screen, the Options screen, or the 
System Settings screen). 
• Press or click the Energy Management button on the Options screen. If the system has been 
logged off, you will be required to input the User password and press or click the OK button. 
The Energy Management dialog will appear. 
 
Working With the Energy Management (EM) Screen 
 
Setting Energy 
Management 
 
There are two available modes: Manual and Automatic. In Manual 
mode, you may set an EM limit. In Automatic mode, the control will not 
be limited for energy management, and will operate at the highest level 
possible. 
• Press or click the switch to alternate between Manual and Automatic 
mode. 
• In Manual mode, type in or use the right and left arrow buttons to 
select an Energy Management low limit for the control. Note: If the 
EM limit is set to 0%, the selected control will operate at zero power, 
and will not fire the SCRs. 
 
Exit 
• Press the Back button to save your current EM setting and return to 
the Options screen. 
Energy 
Management 
limit setting 
Use the arrow 
buttons or the 
slider to select 
an EM setting 
Use the switch to 
alternate between 
Manual and Automatic 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
126
System Functions 
 
Overview 
There are several system tools that help manage and provide data for all of the SQ-300i Hybrid 
controls in the system. All of these are accessed using the System Settings screen. 
 
To access the System Settings screen 
• From the Operate screens, press or click the Functions button. The first Functions screen (the 
SQ-300i Options screen) will appear. Press or click the System Settings button. 
 
 
Alarms 
The Alarms function provides alarm reporting for all of the SQ-300i Hybrid controls in the system. 
 
To access the Alarms function 
• From the System Settings screen, press or click the Alarms button to access this function. 
 
 
 
 
 
Lists up to the last 
1000 alarm entries. 
The most recent alarm 
is displayed at the top. 
Use these 
buttons to 
scroll through 
the alarm list. 
Use these 
buttons to 
perform 
specific tasks. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
127
Working With the Alarms Screen 
 
Alarm List 
 
• To see control data for any alarm occurrence, first use the up and 
down arrow buttons to highlight the alarm, then press or click the 
Details button to see details. (See image below.) 
• To delete an individual alarm, first use the up and down arrow 
buttons to highlight the alarm, then press or click the Delete button to 
delete it. 
• To save the alarm details for a specific alarm, first use the up and 
down arrow buttons to highlight the alarm, then press or click the 
Save To File button. 
 
 
Exit 
 
• Press the Back button to return to the System Settings screen. 
 
 
 
 
 
Working With the Alarm Details Screen 
 
Alarm Details 
 
• Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the operating 
data for the control. 
• To save these alarm details, press or click the Save To File button. 
 
 
Exit • Press the Back button to return to the Alarms screen. 
Alarm 
generation 
info 
This screen provides 
all of the SQ-300i 
operating data at the 
time of the alarm. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
128
Manage Controls 
The Manage Controls function allows you to view the connection status of all controls, as well as 
add, delete, enable and disable controls from the system. All of the SQ-300i Hybrid 
Microcontrollers must be added here before they will appear as available controls in the system. 
This process should be done upon initial control setup and will likely be left alone thereafter. For 
this reason, these settings are protected by the Administrator password. 
 
NOTE: If you are running SQControl on the Windows® 7 operating system, you must be logged in 
as an Administrator to add controls. Contact your network administrator for help. 
 
To access the Manage Control function 
 
• Press or click the Manage Controls button on the System Settings screen. If the system has 
been logged off, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and press or click the 
OK button. 
 
Working With the Manage Controls Screen 
 
Navigation 
 
• Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of 
controls. 
• Highlight one of the controls and press or click the Move Up or Move 
Down button. (This will change the order in which the control 
appears in the Table View as well as the Operate screens.) 
• Press the Back button to return to the System Settings screen. 
 
 
Add Control 
 
• Use this option to add a control to the system. See Add Control. 
 
Lists all of the controls currently 
associated with the operator 
interface or PC. Control types 
include: 
 SQi: SQ-300i Conventional 
 SQiH: SQ-300i Hybrid Conv 
 3PhL: SQ-300i 3-Phase 
 3PhH: SQ-300i Hybrid 3-Ph 
Get detailed 
information 
for any control 
selected. 
Save and load 
control 
profiles. 
Change the 
display order 
of the 
controls. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
129
 
Working With the Manage Controls Screen 
 
Control Options 
 
• Highlight one of the controls in the list, then do any of the following: 
o Press or click the Edit button to change the plate area or spacing 
or verify the IP Address. 
o Press or click the Delete button to remove the control from the 
list. 
o Press or click the Enable/Disable button to change the control 
status to enabled or disabled. (If you disable a control, it will 
remain disabled until you go back and enable it, even if 
SQControl is restarted.) 
 
 
Detailed 
Information 
 
• Highlight one of the controls, then do either of the following: 
o Press or click the Control Information button to access a 
detailed summary of the control configuration. 
 
This information is only 
available when the control is 
connected. 
 
o Press or click the Done 
button to close this 
dialog. 
 
 
o Press or click the 
Command History 
button to access a list of up to the last 1000 commands received by 
the control. 
 
This information is only available when the control is connected. 
 
 
 
o Press or click the Refresh button to update the history. 
o Press or click the Back button to return to the Manage Controls 
main screen. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
130
 
 
Working With the Manage Controls Screen 
 
Profiles 
 
• Press or click the Write Profile button to save the current profile so it 
can be copied to a different control. The software will pull all of the 
setup parametersfor the selected control and write them to a file. 
The file should be saved in the standard program data directory§. 
Note: The software will only store one profile. If you save 
another profile, the existing .pfl file will be overwritten. 
 Note: The Profile options are not available for NWL 
PowerPlus™ controls. 
• Press or click the Read Profile button to copy a saved profile to a 
control. (The software will perform some checks before it writes the 
profile to the control.) 
• Press or click the Export Control List button to save the list of 
controls to a .CSV file. 
• Press or click the Import Control List button to obtain a list of 
controls from a .CSV file. 
 
 
Security 
 
• Press the Security button to access the Change Passwords screen. 
(See Change Passwords.) 
 
 
To add an SQ-300 i Hybrid to the system 
• Press the Add button. The Input screen will appear. 
 
• Select the Control Type. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
131
o When you select the Babcock & Wilcox SQ-300i control, the software and the control 
must communicate before the software will report back specifically which type it is. 
Once the control is successfully added, the Type column on the Manage Controls 
screen will display SQiH for the Hybrid Single-Phase control. 
o When you select the NWL PowerPlus DSP control, you will have limited control of the 
NWL device through SQControl. You will be able to start, stop, and reduce the power 
level, set selected parameters, run V-I Curves, and monitor alarms and events. 
• Use the keypad to enter the IP address for the SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller. Press the 
Verify button to check for a response from the address. 
• Enter the plate area and plate spacing for the field 
• Press or click the OK button to save the new control and return to the Manage Controls screen. 
• Press or click the Cancel button to return to the previous screen without saving changes. 
 
To change passwords 
• Press the Security button. The Change Passwords screen will appear. 
 
• To change the Administrator password, enter the current password in the first field of the 
Change Administrator Password section. (If you’re working without a keyboard, press the 
button to the right of the field.) 
• Enter the new password in the second and third fields (to confirm it). 
• Press the Update button to save the new password. 
• To change the User password, follow the same process in the Change User Password section. 
• To disable Security, mark the Security is Disabled field. Keep in mind that if security is 
disabled, all of the control features are accessible to any user. 
• Press the Back button to return to the Manage Controls screen. 
 
Access a 
keyboard 
so you can 
type in 
your new 
password. 
This will disable 
the Security 
feature. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
132
 
 
Manage OPC I/O 
OPC is the standard for data exchange between devices and systems, regardless of platform or 
manufacturer. OPC requires two components: a server and a client. A server acts as a hub for 
data collection from one or more clients (systems). A client can send its data to a server, and it can 
retrieve data from other systems (clients) via a server. 
 
The addition of OPC functionality to SQControl software makes it easier for you to integrate all of 
your plant systems. The Manage OPC I/O feature performs the role of OPC client. It allows you to 
create OPC client entries that you can use to monitor (and in some cases, change) tag values on 
external OPC servers. This makes it possible for you to view the values from external systems, 
such as an opacity value or the state of a digital control signal. You can monitor the client entries 
that you create in the External I/O Table View tab. 
 
� 
• SQControl is delivered with a separate OPC Server module. This 
OPC Server will be used as the hub for data collection from SQControl 
only; it will make this data available to external systems. While it is 
possible to define an OPC client I/O item in SQControl that monitors a 
tag on the SQControl OPC Server, doing so is not recommended. 
Since the SQControl OPC Server will only house data from 
SQControl, creating an OPC client I/O item in SQControl that monitors 
a tag on the SQControl OPC Server can create a “loopback” condition 
that can slow down the program’s operation or cause errors. 
• If you are running SQControl on the Windows® 7 operating system, 
you must be logged in as an Administrator to add OPC I/O items. 
Contact your network administrator for help. 
 
 
To access the Manage OPC I/O function 
• Press or click the Manage OPC I/O button on the System Settings screen. 
• If the system has been logged off, you will be required to input the Administrator Password and 
press or click the OK button. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
133
 
 
 
 
 
Working With the Manage OPC I/O Screen 
 
Navigation 
 
• Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of I/O 
items. 
• Press the Back button to return to the System Settings screen. 
 
 
Add Item 
 
• Use this option to add an I/O item to the system. See Add I/O item. 
 
 
Editing Items 
 
• Highlight one of the items in the list, then do any of the following: 
o Press or click the Properties button to edit the item settings. 
o Press or click the Delete button to remove the item from the list. 
o Press or click the Value button to change the value of a 
read/write item (which is especially useful for turning an item on 
or off). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Use these 
buttons to 
Add, Edit, and 
Delete OPC 
items. 
Use the Value 
button to 
change the 
value of any 
read/write item. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
134
To add an OPC I/O item to the system 
• Press the Add button. The Add I/O Item screen will appear. 
 
 
 
• Enter a name for the input or output item in the first field. 
• Use the next field for the Host name. (You may leave this as <Local> if the OPC Server is on 
the same computer as SQControl.) 
• At the Server field, search for and select the appropriate external server. (Reminder: B&W 
does not recommend creating an OPC I/O item from the SQControl OPC Server.) 
• At the Tag field, search for and select the appropriate tag. 
• Press or click the OK button to save the new I/O and return to the Manage OPC I/O screen. 
• Press or click the Cancel button to return to the previous screen without saving changes. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
135
Event Log 
The Event Log function provides event and error reporting for all of the SQ-300i Hybrid controls in 
the system. This information may be helpful when troubleshooting. 
 
To access the Event Log function 
• Press or click the Event button on the System Settings screen. The Events list will appear. 
 
 
 
Working With the Events Screen 
 
Event List 
 
The most recent event or error will display at the top of the list. It will 
display all events and all errors in its memory (as long as both are 
selected for display). The system saves events for up to the last 30 days. 
• Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the list. 
• Check the Events box to display all event messages. 
• Check the Errors box to display all error messages. 
• Press or click the Save button to save the listed events in a text file. 
The file is stored in the standard program data directory§. 
 
 
Exit 
• Press or click the Back button to return to the System Settings 
screen. 
Lists selectedevents for up 
to the past 30 
days. 
Use these check 
boxes to determine 
what will display. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
136
Communications 
Overview 
The SQ-300i Hybrid is fully capable of communicating with a remote or local device, or operating in 
a communications network through a standard Ethernet connection. The communications circuitry 
is located on both the SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller and on the optional Operator Interface, and 
operates independently of control operations. 
 
To use the communications capabilities of the SQ-300i Hybrid components, each SQ-300i Hybrid 
Microcontroller and Operator Interface must have a unique address. The IP address for the 
Microcontroller is set using the SQDiscover software. Please consult the Microsoft Windows 
Network Hardware Configuration documentation for setting the IP address of the Operator 
Interface. 
 
 
Communications Networks 
The SQ-300i Hybrid is configured to work using Modbus® TCP/IP (Ethernet) communication. This 
method of communications is becoming more standard in industrial environments because it 
provides faster communication, and because it allows the control systems to become a part of the 
normal computer network/intranet. The SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller, operator interface, remote 
computers, and other systems will be connected using Ethernet cabling, switches and/or routers 
appropriate for the environment. 
 
To implement a communications network, each of the SQ-300i Hybrid Microcontroller (and 
Operator Interfaces, if applicable) is connected to an Ethernet switch. This switch may then be 
connected to a remote computer (running the SQControl or Precipitator Manager software) for 
remote control and display. The number of controls that may be connected to this network is 
technically limited to the number of fixed IP addresses available on the network, though other 
factors may apply. Any of these controls may be removed from the network without rewiring or 
adversely affecting other SQ-300i Hybrid controls in the network. 
 
Short cable runs for distances up to 10 feet should use a patch cable assembly. Long cable runs 
for distances from 10 feet to 300 feet should use a riser cable assembly. Recommended parts and 
tools for each of these cable types are included in the tables below. Using parts other than the 
recommended parts may have a negative impact on communication and operation. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Recommended Network Communication Parts 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
137
 
Description Manufacturer Manufacturer Part Number
CAT 6 Patch Cable L-Com TFC6101
CAT 6 Shielded Connectors Bomar Interconnect 300668SEZ
CAT 6 Snagless Boot Bomar Interconnect CXB600EZ
CAT 6 Crimp Tool Platinum Tools EZ-RJPRO HD
Stripper Platinum Tools 15015
Patch Cable Assy (Up To 10')
 
 
Description Manufacturer Manufacturer Part Number
CAT 6 Riser Cable L-Com TFC5946
CAT 6 Shielded Connectors L-Com TSP8048C5S
Boot - (Use Heat Shrink)
CAT 6 Crimp Tool Platinum Tools EZ-RJPRO HD
Stripper Platinum Tools 15015
Ground Crimper Platinum Tools 12360C
Riser Cable Assy (10' - 300')
 
 
Description Manufacturer Manufacturer Part Number
6-port (DIN-rail) N-TRON 306TX
24-port (Rackmount or panel mount) N-TRON 524TX
16-port (DIN-rail ) N-TRON 716TX*
6-port (DIN-rail)
 (4 standard ports, 2 fiber ports) N-TRON 106FX2
26-port (Rackmount or panel mount)
 (24 standard ports, 2 fiber ports) N-TRON 526FX2
8-port (DIN-rail)
 (6 standard ports, 2 fiber ports) N-TRON 708FX2*
16-port (DIN-rail)
 (14 standard ports, 2 fiber ports) N-TRON 716FX2*
Industrial Ethernet Switches
 
*The 700-series switches are “managed” switches that may require configuration. Please refer to the switch 
documentation shipped on CD for details. 
 
 
Remote Diagnostics And Real Time Monitoring 
The SQ-300i Hybrid, with or without the optional Precipitator Manager software package, is fully 
capable of being monitored from a remote location for trouble-shooting. All that is required is an 
Ethernet switch and an Ethernet cable. For more information on this service, please contact your 
B&W account or service representative. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
138
Memory Map 
The Memory Map lists the memory locations that are set aside for SQ-300i Hybrid monitoring and 
control. The contents of some locations can be changed from a remote location (if you have the 
appropriate equipment to do so). This means that you may control the SQ-300i Hybrid remotely, 
with a program that uses any Modbus® TCP/IP standard protocol that conforms to the memory 
map. 
 
� • Controlling the SQ-300i Hybrid using the memory locations should 
only be performed by an experienced, knowledgeable user. 
 
 
Any of the memory locations marked as “Write” locations may be changed by the operator. 
 
 
Notes: Any input entered into memory locations other than those “Write” locations may cause 
failure of the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
 
 
Location Type Variable Notes 
40001 Read Limit Status (Low Word) See Limit Table 1 
40002 Read Alarm Status (Low Word) See Alarm Table 1 
40003 Read Primary Current Amps 
40004 Read Primary Voltage Volts 
40005 Read Secondary Current mA 
40006 Read Min Secondary Voltage 0.1 KV 
40007 Read Avg Secondary Voltage 0.1 KV 
40008 Read Max Secondary Voltage 0.1 KV 
40009 Read Firing Angle 0.1 Degrees 
40010 Read Primary Current at Spark, Arc, or Limit Amps 
40011 Read Primary Voltage at Spark, Arc, or Limit Volts 
40012 Read Secondary Current at Spark, Arc, or Limit mA 
40013 Read Min Sec Voltage at Spark, Arc, or Limit 0.1 KV 
40014 Read Avg Sec Voltage at Spark, Arc, or Limit 0.1 KV 
40015 Read Max Sec Voltage at Spark, Arc, or Limit 0.1 KV 
40016 Read Firing Angle at Spark, Arc, or Limit 0.1 Degrees 
40017 Read Spark Rate SPM 
40018 Read Input Power (KVA) 0.1 KVA 
40019 Read Output Power (KW) 0.1 KW 
40020 Read Form Factor (Single Phase Only) 0.01 
40021 Read Pulse Blocking Full Cycles Off (Single Phase Only) Full Cycles 
40022 Read Limit Status (High Word) See Limit Table 2 
40023 Read SCR Status (Why SCR not firing) See SCR Table 
40024 Read Program Version 
40025 Read Manual Pot Input 
40026 Read Measured HZ reading minimum 0.1 Hz 
40027 Read Measured HZ reading avg 0.1 Hz 
40028 Read Measured HZ reading maximum 0.1 Hz 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
139
 
Location Type Variable Notes 
40029 Read Fast Ramp Rate (High Word) 
0.0001 Deg/half 
Cycle 
40030 Read Fast Ramp Rate (Low Word) 
0.0001 Deg/half 
Cycle 
40031 Read Slow Ramp Rate (High Word) 
0.0001 Deg/half 
Cycle 
40032 Read Slow Ramp Rate (Low Word) 
0.0001 Deg/half 
Cycle 
40033 Read 
Secondary Current Waveform Distortion (Single Phase 
Only) % 
40034 Read Fractional Conduction Rated Value (Single Phase Only) 0.01 
40035 Read Fractional Conduction Value (Single Phase Only) 0.01 
40036 Read Peak to Average Voltage Ratio 0.01 
40037 Read Output to VI Control Winding (Single Phase Only) % 
40038 Read 
BC Search (0 = none; 1 = Allow 2 = Active - Single Phase 
Only) 
40039 Read BC Search Minutes Left Until Search (Single Phase Only) Minutes 
40040 Read BC PB Ratio (Single Phase Only) Full Cycles 
40041 Read BC Firing Angle (Single Phase Only) 0.1 Degrees 
40042 Read BC Limit (Single Phase Only) 1 = Limit 
40043 Read Secondary Current Reading (RC Test) mA 
40044 Read Secondary Voltage Reading (RC Test) 0.1 KV 
40045 Read Secondary Time Constant (RC Test) 1/400 of HC 
40046 Read State of Precip RC Test See RC Test Table 
40047 Read Seconds On Since SQ300i Reset (High Word) 
40048 Read Seconds On Since SQ300i Reset (Low Word) 
40049 Read Days On SinceSQ300i Reset 
40050 Read Hours On Since SQ300i Reset 
40051 Read Minutes On Since SQ300i Reset 
40052 Read Seconds On Since SQ300i Reset 
40053 Read Total Seconds SQ300i On (High Word) 
40054 Read Total Seconds SQ300i On (Low Word) 
40055 Read Total Days SQ300i On 
40056 Read Total Hours SQ300i On 
40057 Read Total Minutes SQ300i On 
40058 Read Total Seconds SQ300i On 
40059 Read Seconds On Since TR Start (High Word) 
40060 Read Seconds On Since TR Start (Low Word) 
40061 Read Days On Since TR Start 
40062 Read Hours On Since TR Start 
40063 Read Minutes On Since TR Start 
40064 Read Seconds On Since TR Start 
40065 Read Total Seconds TR On (High Word) 
40066 Read Total Seconds TR On (Low Word) 
40067 Read Total Days TR On 
40068 Read Total Hours TR On 
40069 Read Total Minutes TR On 
40070 Read Total Seconds TR On 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
140
Location Type Variable Notes 
40071 Read Line Voltage Average Volts 
40072 Read Line Voltage RMS Volts 
40073 Read Line Voltage Cal (High Word) (Float) 
40074 Read Line Voltage Cal (2nd Word) (Float) 
40075 Read Line Voltage Cal (3rd Word) (Float) 
40076 Read Line Voltage Cal (Low Word) (Float) 
40077 Read Line Voltage Scale (11100 or 7160 for Hybrid) 0.1 Volts 
40078 Read Conduction Value (Single Phase Only) % 
40079 Read 
Onboard Back Corona Search Request (Single Phase 
Only) Aah = Request 
40080 Read Primary Current L B (3 Phase Only) Amps 
40081 Read Primary Current L C (3 Phase Only) Amps 
40082 Read Primary Voltage L BC (3 Phase Only) Volts 
40083 Read Primary Voltage L CA (3 Phase Only) Volts 
40084 Read NOVRAM_LINE_VOLT_CAL_SETTING VOLTS 
40085 Read NOVRAM_LINE_VOLT_CAL_RMS_READING_COUNTS COUNTS 
40086 Read LINE_VOLTAGE_RMS_READING_COUNTS COUNTS 
40087 Read LINE_VOLTAGE_READ_DIF_FROM_CAL_COUNTS COUNTS 
40088 Read Maximum Voltage Read on RC Test (C Part) COUNTS 
40089 Read Target Voltage for one time constant on RC Test COUNTS 
40090 Read Last Voltage Reading above Target on RC Test COUNTS 
40091 Read First Voltage Reading below Target on RC Test COUNTS 
40092 Read Primary Current L A (3 Phase Only) Amps 
40093 Read Primary Voltage L AB (3 Phase Only) Volts 
40094 Read Line Voltage L AB (3 Phase Only) Volts 
40095 Read Line Voltage L BC (3 Phase Only) Volts 
40096 Read Line Voltage L CA (3 Phase Only) Volts 
40097 Read Input Power LA 0.1 KVA 
40098 Read Input Power LB 0.1 KVA 
40099 Read Input Power LC 0.1 KVA 
40100 Read Alarm Status (High Word) See Alarm Table 2 
40101 Read Rapper Status Bit wide 
40102 Read Rapper Feedback Bit wide 
40103 Read Digital Output Data Bit wide 
40104 Read Digital Input Data Bit wide 
40105 Read Analog Output 1 Raw (0-32767) 
40106 Read Analog Output 2 Raw (0-32767) 
40107 Read Analog Output 3 Raw (0-32767) 
40108 Read Analog Output 4 Raw (0-32767) 
40109 Read Analog Output 5 Raw (0-32767) 
40110 Read Analog Output 6 Raw (0-32767) 
40111 Read Analog Output 7 Raw (0-32767) 
40112 Read Analog Output 8 Raw (0-32767) 
40113 Read Analog Output 9 Raw (0-32767) 
40114 Read Analog Output 10 Raw (0-32767) 
40115 Read Analog Output 11 Raw (0-32767) 
40116 Read Analog Output 12 Raw (0-32767) 
40117 Read Analog Output 13 Raw (0-32767) 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
141
Location Type Variable Notes 
40118 Read Analog Output 14 Raw (0-32767) 
40119 Read Analog Output 15 Raw (0-32767) 
40120 Read Analog Output 16 Raw (0-32767) 
40121 Read Analog Input 1 Raw (0-32767) 
40122 Read Analog Input 2 Raw (0-32767) 
40123 Read Analog Input 3 Raw (0-32767) 
40124 Read Analog Input 4 Raw (0-32767) 
40125 Read Rapper 1 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40126 Read Rapper 1 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40127 Read Rapper 2 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40128 Read Rapper 2 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40129 Read Rapper 3 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40130 Read Rapper 3 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40131 Read Rapper 4 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40132 Read Rapper 4 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40133 Read Normal Digital Input 
40134 Read Heater Status Bit wide 
40135 Read Horn Status Bit wide 
40136 Read Horn 1 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40137 Read Horn 1 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40138 Read Horn 2 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40139 Read Horn 2 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40140 Read Horn 3 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40141 Read Horn 3 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40142 Read Horn 4 Time Left (High Word) 0.1 Sec 
40143 Read Horn 4 Time Left (Low Word) 0.1 Sec 
40144 Read Analog Input 5 Raw (0-32767) 
40145 Read Analog Input 6 Raw (0-32767) 
40146 Read Analog Input 7 Raw (0-32767) 
40147 Read Analog Input 8 Raw (0-32767) 
40148 Read Heater Feedback Status Bit Wide 
40149 Read Aux Contact State 0 = Off/1 = On 
40150 Read Vbus Voltage (Mid Frequency Only) Volts 
40151 Read Length of Positive Line Voltage Pulse uSeconds 
40152 Read Length of Negative Line Voltage Pulse uSeconds 
40153 Read Time between 2 Posistive Pulses uSeconds 
40154 Read Time between 2 Negative Pulses uSeconds 
40155 Read Jitter (Time Difference between Pos and Neg Pulse) uSeconds 
40156 Read Jitter Side (0 = Pos/ 1 = Neg) 
40251 Read Primary Current Limit Amps 
40252 Read Primary Voltage Limit Volts 
40253 Read Secondary Current Limit mA 
40254 Read Secondary Average Voltage Limit 0.1 KV 
40255 Read Secondary Peak Voltage Limit 0.1 KV 
40256 Read Secondary Voltage Limit Type See KV Limit Table 
40257 Read Spark Rate SPM 
40258 Read Firing Angle Limit 0.1 Degrees 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
142
Location Type Variable Notes 
40259 Read Spark Sense 
40260 Read Spark Quench FC 
40261 Read Arc Quench FC 
40262 Read Fast Ramp HC 
40263 Read Set Back (Spark) % 
40264 Read Spark Reaction (Single Phase Only) 0=Quench/1=Spit 
40265 Read Spit Spark Set Back (Single Phase Only) % 
40266 Read Back Corona Search Time Interval (Single Phase Only) Minutes 
40267 Read Back Corona Starting Pulse Ratio (Single Phase Only) FC 
40268 Read Back Corona Ending Pulse Ratio (Single Phase Only) FC 
40269 Read 
B C Search Minimum Secondary Current (Single Phase 
Only) mA 
40270 Read 
B C Search Starting Secondary Current (Single Phase 
Only) mA 
40271 Read 
Firing Angle Limit in Pulse Blocking Mode (Single Phase 
Only) 0.1 Degrees 
40272 Read Pulse Blocking Mode Full Cycles Off (Single Phase Only) FC 
40273 Read VI-CLR Manual/Automatic Setting (Single Phase Only) 0=Man/1=Auto 
40274 Read VI-CLR Manual Setting (Single Phase Only) 
40275 Read VI-CLR Delay between changes (Single Phase Only) 0.1 Sec 
40276 Read VI-CLR Resistive Dust Routine (Single Phase Only) 0=Off/1=On 
40277 Read Rapper 1 Off Period Minutes 
40278 Read Rapper 1 On Period Seconds 
40279 Read Rapper 2 Off Period Minutes 
40280 Read Rapper 2 On Period Seconds 
40281 Read Rapper 3 Off Period Minutes 
40282 Read Rapper 3 On Period Seconds 
40283 Read Rapper 4 Off Period Minutes 
40284 Read Rapper 4 On Period Seconds 
40285 Read Rapper 1 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40286 Read Rapper 2 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40287 Read Rapper 3 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40288 Read Rapper 4 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40289 Read Rapper Running Time After SQ300i is Halted Seconds 
40290 Read Primary Over Current Alarm Amps 
40291 Read Primary Under Voltage Alarm Volts 
40292 Read Secondary Over Current Alarm mA 
40293 Read Secondary Under Voltage Alarm KV 
40294 Read Imbalance Alarm 0=Off/1=On 
40295 Read Alarm Contact Type 0=NO/1=NC 
40296 Read TR Set Primary Voltage Rating Volts 
40297 Read TR Set Primary Current Rating Amps 
40298 Read TR Set Secondary Current Rating mA 
40299 Read TR Set Secondary Average Voltage Rating 0.1 KV 
40300 Read TR Set Secondary Peak Voltage Rating 0.1 KV 
40301 Read TR Set Form Factor Rating (Single Phase Only) 0.01 
40302 Read Secondary Voltage Feedback0=NO/1=Yes 
40303 Read Primary Current Scale Amps 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
143
Location Type Variable Notes 
40304 Read Secondary Current Scale mA 
40305 Read Secondary Voltage Scale 0.1 KV 
40306 Read Juice Can Installed (Single Phase Only) 0=NO/1=Yes 
40307 Read Plate Area 
40308 Read Plate Spacing 
40309 Read IP1 
40310 Read IP2 
40311 Read IP3 
40312 Read IP4 
40313 Read Sub Mask 1 
40314 Read Sub Mask 2 
40315 Read Sub Mask 3 
40316 Read Sub Mask 4 
40317 Read SQ300i Name Character 1 
40318 Read SQ300i Name Character 2 
40319 Read SQ300i Name Character 3 
40320 Read SQ300i Name Character 4 
40321 Read SQ300i Name Character 5 
40322 Read SQ300i Name Character 6 
40323 Read SQ300i Name Character 7 
40324 Read SQ300i Name Character 8 
40325 Read SQ300i Name Character 9 
40326 Read SQ300i Name Character 10 
40327 Read Spark Flag Set if Spark Occurred 
40328 Read Trigger Type Used in Scope 
40329 Read Trigger Delay Used in Scope 
40330 Read Pulse Blocking Reduced Power Level (Single Phase Only) % Power 
40331 Read Minimum Secondary Current for Remote Limits mA 
40332 Read Line Voltage Rating 
40333 Read Minimum Primary Current Allowed in Manual Mode Amps 
40334 Read Spark Mode 0=KV/1=MA 
40335 Read Search Ramp Rate 1 - 9 
40336 Read HZ Rating 
500=50 Hz / 
600=60 Hz 
40337 Read Interface Version Number 
40338 Read Control Version Number 
40339 Read External Reduced-Power Rapping Percentage 0 - 100% 
40340 Read External Reduced-Power Rapping Type See Table 
40341 Read External Reduced-CO Input 1 Percentage 0 - 100% 
40342 Read External Reduced-CO Input 1 Type See Table 
40343 Read External Reduced-CO Input 2 Percentage 0 - 100% 
40344 Read External Reduced-CO Input 2 Type See Table 
40345 Read Heater 1 On Level 0 - 100% 
40346 Read Heater 1 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40347 Read Heater 2 On Level 0 - 100% 
40348 Read Heater 2 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40349 Read Heater 3 On Level 0 - 100% 
40350 Read Heater 3 Off Level 0 - 100% 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
144
Location Type Variable Notes 
40351 Read Heater 4 On Level 0 - 100% 
40352 Read Heater 4 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40353 Read Horn 1 Off Period Minutes 
40354 Read Horn 1 On Period Seconds 
40355 Read Horn 2 Off Period Minutes 
40356 Read Horn 2 On Period Seconds 
40357 Read Horn 3 Off Period Minutes 
40358 Read Horn 3 On Period Seconds 
40359 Read Horn 4 Off Period Minutes 
40360 Read Horn 4 On Period Seconds 
40361 Read Horn 1 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40362 Read Horn 2 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40363 Read Horn 3 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40364 Read Horn 4 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40365 Read Horn Running Time After SQ300i is Halted Seconds 
40366 Read Spark Alarm 0 = Off/1 = On 
40367 Read Spark Alarm Level SPM 
40368 Read Expansion IO Type See Expansion Table 
40369 Read Conduction Limit % 
40370 Read Display Type 0=None/1=Aux 
40371 Read Recovery Ramp Delay 0-9 (5 Default) 
40372 Read Custom Flash See Custom Table 
40373 Read Under Voltage Time Delay 1-99 Seconds 
40374 Read Hybrid Board Type 
See Table Hybrid 
Board 
40375 Read Hz Mismatch Alarm (0=Off/1=On) 0=Off/1=On 
40376 Read Interface Build Number 
40377 Read Control Build Number 
40378 Read SCR1 Delay 
40379 Read SCR2 Delay 
40380 Read SCR3 Delay 
40381 Read SCR4 Delay 
40382 Read SCR5 Delay 
40383 Read SCR6 Delay 
40384 Read Dead Band Percent 2-50 % 
40385 Read Limit Ramp Rate 
100-1000 (0.0001 
Deg/HC) 
40386 Read Dead Band Ramp Rate 
11-110 (0.0001 
Deg/HC) 
40387 Read Number Pulses on Pulse Blocking (3 Phase Only) 1 or 2 
40388 Read Power Restore State 
See Power Restore 
Table 
40389 Read VI-CLR Output Enabled (Hybrid Single Phase Only) 
0 = Disabled/ 1 
Enabled 
40390 Read Primary Voltage Input 
0 = SCR Output/1 TR 
Input 
40391 Read Adaptive Spark Adjustment 0 = Off/1 = On 
40401 Read Digital Output 1 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
145
Location Type Variable Notes 
40402 Read Digital Output 2 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40403 Read Digital Output 3 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40404 Read Digital Output 4 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40405 Read Digital Output 5 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40406 Read Digital Output 6 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40407 Read Digital Output 7 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40408 Read Digital Output 8 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40409 Read Digital Input 1 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40410 Read Digital Input 2 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40411 Read Digital Input 3 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40412 Read Digital Input 4 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40413 Read Digital Input 5 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40414 Read Digital Input 6 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40415 Read Digital Input 7 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40416 Read Digital Input 8 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40417 Read Digital Input 9 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40418 Read Digital Input 10 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40419 Read Digital Input 11 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40420 Read Digital Input 12 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40421 Read Analog Output 1 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40422 Read Analog Output 2 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40423 Read Analog Output 3 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40424 Read Analog Output 4 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40425 Read Analog Output 5 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40426 Read Analog Output 6 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40427 Read Analog Output 7 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40428 Read Analog Output 8 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40429 Read Analog Output 9 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40430 Read Analog Output 10 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40431 Read Analog Output 11 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40432 Read Analog Output 12 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40433 Read Analog Output 13 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
146
Location Type Variable Notes 
40434 Read Analog Output 14 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40435 Read Analog Output 15 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40436 Read Analog Output 16 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40437 Read Analog Input 1 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40438 Read Analog Input 2 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40439 Read Analog Input 3 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40440 Read Analog Input 4 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40441 Read Analog Input 5 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40442 Read Analog Input 6 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40443 Read Analog Input 7 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40444 Read Analog Input 8 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40445 Read Aux Contact Def Aux Contract Table 
40446 Read Internal Digital Input Def See Dig In Def Table 
40501 Write Primary Current Limit Amps 
40502 Write Primary Voltage Limit Volts 
40503 Write Secondary Current Limit mA 
40504 Write Secondary Average Voltage Limit 0.1 KV 
40505 Write Secondary Peak Voltage Limit 0.1 KV 
40506 Write Secondary Voltage Limit Type See KV Limit Table 
40507 Write Spark Rate SPM 
40508 Write Firing Angle Limit 0.1 Degrees 
40509 Write Spark Sense 
40510 Write Spark Quench FC 
40511 Write Arc Quench FC 
40512 Write Fast Ramp HC 
40513 Write Set Back (Spark) % 
40514 Write Spark Reaction (Single Phase Only) 0=Quench/1=Spit 
40515 Write Spit Spark Set Back (Single Phase Only) % 
40516 Write Back Corona Search Time Interval (Single Phase Only) Minutes 
40517 Write Back Corona Starting Pulse Ratio (Single Phase Only) FC 
40518 Write Back Corona Ending Pulse Ratio (Single Phase Only) FC 
40519 Write 
B C Search Minimum Secondary Current (Single Phase 
Only) mA 
40520 Write 
B C Search Starting Secondary Current (Single Phase 
Only) mA 
40521 Write 
Firing Angle Limit in Pulse Blocking Mode (Single Phase 
Only) 0.1 Degrees 
40522 Write PulseBlocking Mode Full Cycles Off (Single Phase Only) FC 
40523 Write VI-CLR Manual/Automatic Setting (Single Phase Only) 0=Man/1=Auto 
40524 Write VI-CLR Manual Setting (Single Phase Only) 
40525 Write VI-CLR Delay between changes (Single Phase Only) Seconds 
40526 Write VI-CLR Resistive Dust Routine (Single Phase Only) 0=Off/1=On 
40527 Write Rapper 1 Off Period Minutes 
40528 Write Rapper 1 On Period Seconds 
40529 Write Rapper 2 Off Period Minutes 
40530 Write Rapper 2 On Period Seconds 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
147
Location Type Variable Notes 
40531 Write Rapper 3 Off Period Minutes 
40532 Write Rapper 3 On Period Seconds 
40533 Write Rapper 4 Off Period Minutes 
40534 Write Rapper 4 On Period Seconds 
40535 Write Rapper 1 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40536 Write Rapper 2 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40537 Write Rapper 3 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40538 Write Rapper 4 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40539 Write Rapper Running Time After SQ300i is Halted Seconds 
40540 Write Primary Over Current Alarm Amps 
40541 Write Primary Under Voltage Alarm Volts 
40542 Write Secondary Over Current Alarm mA 
40543 Write Secondary Under Voltage Alarm KV 
40544 Write Imbalance Alarm 0=Off/1=On 
40545 Write Alarm Contact Type 0=NO/1=NC 
40546 Write TR Set Primary Voltage Rating Volts 
40547 Write TR Set Primary Current Rating Amps 
40548 Write TR Set Secondary Current Rating mA 
40549 Write TR Set Secondary Average Voltage Rating 0.1 KV 
40550 Write TR Set Secondary Peak Voltage Rating 0.1 KV 
40551 Write TR Set Form Factor Rating (Single Phase Only) 0.01 
40552 Write Secondary Voltage Feedback 0=NO/1=Yes 
40553 Write Primary Current Scale Amps 
40554 Write Secondary Current Scale mA 
40555 Write Secondary Voltage Scale 0.1 KV 
40556 Write Juice Can Installed (Single Phase Only) 0=NO/1=Yes 
40557 Write Plate Area 
40558 Write Plate Spacing 
40559 Write IP1 
40560 Write IP2 
40561 Write IP3 
40562 Write IP4 
40563 Write Sub Mask 1 
40564 Write Sub Mask 2 
40565 Write Sub Mask 3 
40566 Write Sub Mask 4 
40567 Write SQ300i Name Character 1 
40568 Write SQ300i Name Character 2 
40569 Write SQ300i Name Character 3 
40570 Write SQ300i Name Character 4 
40571 Write SQ300i Name Character 5 
40572 Write SQ300i Name Character 6 
40573 Write SQ300i Name Character 7 
40574 Write SQ300i Name Character 8 
40575 Write SQ300i Name Character 9 
40576 Write SQ300i Name Character 10 
40577 Write Spark Flag Set if Spark Occurred 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
148
Location Type Variable Notes 
40578 Write Trigger Type Used in Scope 
40579 Write Trigger Delay Used in Scope 
40580 Write Pulse Blocking Reduced Power Level (Single Phase Only) % Power 
40581 Write Minimum Secondary Current for Remote Limits mA 
40582 Write Line Voltage Rating 
40583 Write Minimum Primary Current Allowed in Manual Mode Amps 
40584 Write Spark Mode 0=KV/1=MA 
40585 Write Search Ramp Rate 1 - 9 
40586 Write HZ Rating 
500=50 hz/600=60 
Hz 
40587 Write Interface Version Number 
40588 Write Control Version Number 
40589 Write External Reduced-Power Rapping Percentage 0 - 100% 
40590 Write External Reduced-Power Rapping Type See Table 
40591 Write External Reduced-CO Input 1 Percentage 0 - 100% 
40592 Write External Reduced-CO Input 1 Type See Table 
40593 Write External Reduced-CO Input 2 Percentage 0 - 100% 
40594 Write External Reduced-CO Input 2 Type See Table 
40595 Write Heater 1 On Level 0 - 100% 
40596 Write Heater 1 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40597 Write Heater 2 On Level 0 - 100% 
40598 Write Heater 2 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40599 Write Heater 3 On Level 0 - 100% 
40600 Write Heater 3 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40601 Write Heater 4 On Level 0 - 100% 
40602 Write Heater 4 Off Level 0 - 100% 
40603 Write Horn 1 Off Period Minutes 
40604 Write Horn 1 On Period Seconds 
40605 Write Horn 2 Off Period Minutes 
40606 Write Horn 2 On Period Seconds 
40607 Write Horn 3 Off Period Minutes 
40608 Write Horn 3 On Period Seconds 
40609 Write Horn 4 Off Period Minutes 
40610 Write Horn 4 On Period Seconds 
40611 Write Horn 1 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40612 Write Horn 2 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40613 Write Horn 3 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40614 Write Horn 4 Reduced Level % Pri Cur Limit 
40615 Write Horn Running Time After SQ300i is Halted Seconds 
40616 Write Spark Alarm 0 = Off/1 = On 
40617 Write Spark Alarm Level SPM 
40618 Write Expansion IO Type See Expansion Table 
40619 Write Conduction Limit % (60-100) 
40620 Write Display Type 0=None/1=Aux 
40621 Write Recovery Ramp Delay 0-9 (5 Default) 
40622 Write Custom Flash See Custom Table 
40623 Write Under Voltage Time Delay 1-99 Seconds 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
149
Location Type Variable Notes 
40624 Write Hybrid Board Type (note:Default to be 1 - Single Phase) 
See Table Hybrid 
Board 
40625 Write Hz Mismatch Alarm (0=Off/1=On) 0=Off/1=On 
40626 Write Interface Build Number 
40627 Write Control Build Number 
40628 Write SCR1 Delay 
40629 Write SCR2 Delay 
40630 Write SCR3 Delay 
40631 Write SCR4 Delay 
40632 Write SCR5 Delay 
40633 Write SCR6 Delay 
40634 Write Dead Band Percent 2-50 % 
40635 Write Limit Ramp Rate 
100-1000 (0.0001 
Deg/HC) 
40636 Write Dead Band Ramp Rate 
11-110 (0.0001 
Deg/HC) 
40637 Write Number Pulses on Pulse Blocking (3 Phase Only) 1 or 2 
40638 Write Power Restore State 
See Power Restore 
Table 
40639 Write VI-CLR Output Enabled (Hybrid Single Phase Only) 
0 = Disabled/ 1 
Enabled 
40640 Write Primary Voltage Input 
0 = SCR Output/1 TR 
Input 
40641 Write Adaptive Spark Adjustment 0 = Off/1 = On 
40651 Write Digital Output 1 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40652 Write Digital Output 2 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40653 Write Digital Output 3 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40654 Write Digital Output 4 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40655 Write Digital Output 5 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40656 Write Digital Output 6 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40657 Write Digital Output 7 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40658 Write Digital Output 8 Def 
See Dig Out Def 
Table 
40659 Write Digital Input 1 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40660 Write Digital Input 2 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40661 Write Digital Input 3 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40662 Write Digital Input 4 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40663 Write Digital Input 5 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40664 Write Digital Input 6 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40665 Write Digital Input 7 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40666 Write Digital Input 8 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40667 Write Digital Input 9 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40668 Write Digital Input 10 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40669 Write Digital Input 11 Def See Dig In Def Table 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
150
Location Type Variable Notes 
40670 Write Digital Input 12 Def See Dig In Def Table 
40671 Write Analog Output 1 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40672 Write Analog Output 2 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40673 Write Analog Output 3 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40674 Write Analog Output 4 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40675 Write Analog Output 5 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40676 Write Analog Output 6 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40677 Write Analog Output 7 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40678 Write Analog Output 8 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40679 Write Analog Output 9 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40680 Write Analog Output 10 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40681 Write Analog Output 11 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40682 Write Analog Output 12 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table40683 Write Analog Output 13 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40684 Write Analog Output 14 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40685 Write Analog Output 15 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40686 Write Analog Output 16 Def 
See Ana Out Def 
Table 
40687 Write Analog Input 1 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40688 Write Analog Input 2 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40689 Write Analog Input 3 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40690 Write Analog Input 4 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40691 Write Analog Input 5 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40692 Write Analog Input 6 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40693 Write Analog Input 7 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40694 Write Analog Input 8 Def See Ana In Def Table 
40695 Write Aux Contact Def Aux Contract Table 
40696 Write Internal Digital Input Def See Dig In Def Table 
40752 Write Remote Run/Halt Command (AAh Halt/ 55H Run) 
40753 Write 
Remote Primary Current Limit AAXXh is active 
EMLIMIT!!!!!! XX = Percent of Limit 
40754 Write Remote Primary Voltage Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
40755 Write Remote Secondary Current Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
40756 Write Remote Peak Secondary Voltage Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
40757 Write Remote Average Secondary Voltage Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
40758 Write Remote KW Limit AXXXh is active in 0.1 KW XXX = Actual 0.1 KW 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
151
Loca tion Type Variable Notes 
40759 Write Remote Firing Angle Limit AXXXh is Active in 0.1 Deg; XXX = Actual 0.1 Deg 
40760 Write VI-Curve Start/Stop (AAh Start/55h Stop) 
40761 Write Change Socket timeout AAXXh Valid XX = Minutes 
40762 Write 
Software Digital Output On/Off (55h Turn On/AAh Turn 
Off) 
40763 Write Software Analog Output (AXXXH) XXX = 0-1000d 
40764 Write Software Rapper Control (AAXXH) XX = 0-Fh 
40765 Write 
Digital Input Normal Status (AAH Sets but only if SQ300i is 
halted) 
40766 Write Start Precip RC Test (AAh Starts 00h test is complete) 
40767 Write 
Reset On Clock (XXAAH - Time Since Reset AAXXh - 
Total Time) 
40768 Write Line Voltage Cal (AXXXh XXX = Voltage) 
40769 Write Software Horn Control (AAXXH) XX = 0-Fh 
40770 Write Onboard Back Corona Search Disabled AAh = Disabled 
41002 Read Remote Run/Halt Command (AAh Halt/ 55H Run) 
41003 Read 
Remote Primary Current Limit AAXXh is active 
EMLIMIT!!!!!! XX = Percent of Limit 
41004 Read Remote Primary Voltage Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
41005 Read Remote Secondary Current Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
41006 Read Remote Peak Secondary Voltage Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
41007 Read Remote Average Secondary Voltage Limit AAXXh is active XX = Percent of Limit 
41008 Read Remote KW Limit AXXXh is active in 0.1 KW XXX = Actual 0.1 KW 
41009 Read Remote Firing Angle Limit AXXXh is Active in 0.1 Deg; XXX = Actual 0.1 Deg 
41010 Read VI-Curve Start/Stop (AAh Start/55h Stop) 
41011 Read Change Socket timeout AAXXh Valid XX = Minutes 
41012 Read 
Software Digital Output On/Off (55h Turn On/AAh Turn 
Off) 
41013 Read Software Analog Output (AXXXH) XXX = 0-1000d 
41014 Read Software Rapper Control (AAXXH) XX = 0-Fh 
41015 Read 
Digital Input Normal Status (AAH Sets but only if SQ300i is 
halted) 
41016 Read Start Precip RC Test (AAh Starts 00h test is complete) 
41017 Read 
Reset On Clock (XXAAH - Time Since Reset AAXXh - 
Total Time) 
41018 Read Line Voltage Cal (AXXXh XXX = Voltage) 
41019 Read Software Horn Control (AAXXH) XX = 0-Fh 
41020 Read Onboard Back Corona Search Disabled AAh = Disabled 
41100 Read Time of Event 1 (High Word) 
41101 Read Time of Event 1 (Low Word) 
41102 Read IP Address of Event 1 (High Word) 
41103 Read IP Address of Event 1 (Low Word) 
41104 Read Modbus Address of Event 1 
41105 Read Modbus Value of Event 1 
41106 Read Time of Event 2 (High Word) 
41107 Read Time of Event 2 (Low Word) 
41108 Read IP Address of Event 2 (High Word) 
41109 Read IP Address of Event 2 (Low Word) 
41110 Read Modbus Address of Event 2 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
152
Location Type Variable Notes 
41111 Read Modbus Value of Event 2 
41694 Read Time of Event 100 (High Word) 
41695 Read Time of Event 100 (Low Word) 
41696 Read IP Address of Event 100 (High Word) 
41697 Read IP Address of Event 100 (Low Word) 
41698 Read Modbus Address of Event 100 
41699 Read Modbus Value of Event 100 
41700 Read All Events used (0 = No, non zero = Yes) 
41701 Read Next Event 
 
 
 
 
 
40001 Limit Table 
Bit Meaning 
0 Primary Current Limit 
1 Primary Voltage Limit 
2 Secondary Current Limit 
3 Secondary Average Voltage Limit 
4 Secondary Peak Voltage Limit 
5 Firing Angle Limit 
6 Pulse Blocking Firing Angle Limit 
7 Manual Input Limit 
8 Remote Firing Angle Limit 
9 Remote KW Limit 
10 Remote Primary Current Limit (Standard EM) 
11 Remote Primary Voltage Limit 
12 Remote Secondary Current Limit 
13 Remote Secondary Average Voltage Limit 
14 Remote Secondary Peak Voltage Limit 
15 Spark/Arc/Alarm 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
153
 
40022 Limit Table 2 
Bit Meaning 
0 MA Spark Delay (Used for Display) 
1 KV Spark Delay (Used for Display) 
2 MA Spit Spark Delay (Used for Display) 
3 KV Spit Spark Delay (Used for Display) 
4 Arc Delay (Used for Display) 
5 Reduced Power Rapping 
6 Reduced Power Horn 
7 TR Vacuum Pressure Warning 
8 Scope Mode 
9 VI-Curve Mode 
10 Conduction Limit 
11 TR Over Temp Warning 
12 Remote I/O Comm Error 
13 Remote Run/Halt Disabled 
14 Reserved 
15 Reserved 
 
 
40002 Alarm Table 
Bit Meaning 
0 Primary Over Current Alarm 
1 Primary Under Voltage Alarm 
2 Secondary Over Current Alarm 
3 Secondary Under Voltage Alarm 
4 Hz Mismatch Alarm 
5 Imbalance Alarm 
6 SCR Over Temperature 
7 TR Over Temperature 
8 TR Vacuum Pressure 
9 Emergency Stop 
10 TR Low Oil 
11 Cubical Over Temperature 
12 Boiler Trip 
13 Hopper High 
14 Over Spark Alarm 
15 Remote I/O Comm Alarm 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
154
 
 
40100 Alarm Table 2 
Bit Meaning 
0 Missing Phase Alarm 
1 Internal Hardware Error 
2 Reserved 
3 Reserved 
4 Reserved 
5 Reserved 
6 Reserved 
7 Reserved 
8 Reserved 
9 Reserved 
10 Reserved 
11 Reserved 
12 Reserved 
13 Reserved 
14 Reserved 
15 Reserved 
 
40023 SCR Not Firing 
Bit Meaning 
0 Main Power Off 
1 Hz Mismatch 
2 External Enable Open 
3 Pulse Blocking Off 
4 Spark Quench 
5 Arc Quench 
6 Halted 
7 Breaker Trip 
8 Remote Trip Input 
9 Reserved 
10 Reserved 
11 Reserved 
12 Reserved 
13 Reserved 
14 Reserved 
15 Reserved 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
155
 
 Digital Output 
Value Meaning 
0 Not Used 
1 Rapper Output 1 
2 Rapper Output 2 
3 Rapper Output 3 
4 Rapper Output 4 
5 Alarm Output 
6 Run Output 
7 Software Controlled 
8 Horn Output 1 
9 Horn Output 2 
10 Horn Output 3 
11 Horn Output 4 
12 Heater Output 1 
13 Heater Output 2 
14 Heater Output 3 
15 Heater Output 4 
16 Standby Mode 
17 Contractor Control 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
156
 
 
 Digital Input 
Value Meaning 
0 Not Used 
1 Rapper 1 Feedback 
2 Rapper 2 Feedback 
3 Rapper 3 Feedback 
4 Rapper 4 Feedback 
5 SCR Over Temperature 
6 TR Over Temperature 
7 TR Vacuum Pressure 
8 Emergency Stop 
9 TR Low Oil 
10 Cubical Over Temperature 
11 Boiler Trip 
12 Hopper High 
13 Breaker Trip 
14 Run/Halt Input 
15 Remote Trip Input 
16 Software monitored Input 
17 Remote Limit Input 1 
18 Remote Limit Input2 
19 Remote Limit Input 3 
20 Heater 1 Feedback 
21 Heater 2 Feedback 
22 Heater 3 Feedback 
23 Heater 4 Feedback 
24 TR Vacuum Pressure Warning 
25 TR Over Temp Warning 
26 Run/Halt Disabled 
27 External Enable Input 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
157
 
 
 Analog Output 
Value Meaning 
0 Not Used 
1 Primary Current 
2 Primary Voltage 
3 Secondary Current 
4 Peak Secondary Current 
5 Minimum Secondary Current 
6 Secondary Voltage 
7 Peak Secondary Voltage 
8 Minimum Secondary Voltage 
9 Input Power 
10 Output Power 
11 Spark Rate 
12 Firing Angle 
13 Software Controlled 
 
 
 
 Analog Input 
Value Meaning 
0 Not Used 
1 Opacity 
2 Primary Current - Remote Control 
3 Primary Voltage - Remote Control 
4 Secondary Current- Remote Control 
5 Peak Secondary Current - Remote Control 
6 Minimum Secondary Current - Remote Control 
7 Secondary Voltage - Remote Control 
8 Peak Secondary Voltage - Remote Control 
9 Minimum Secondary Voltage - Remote Control 
10 Input Power - Remote Control 
11 Output Power - Remote Control 
12 Spark Rate - Remote Control 
13 Firing Angle - Remote Control 
14 Software Monitored 
15 TC 1 Feedback 
16 TC 2 Feedback 
17 TC 3 Feedback 
18 TC 4 Feedback 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
158
 
 
 Remote Limit Input Type 
Value Meaning 
0 External Remote Power Rapping Disabled 
1 Primary Current 
2 Primary Voltage 
3 Secondary Current 
4 Secondary Peak Voltage 
5 Secondary Avg. Voltage 
6 KW Limit 
7 Firing Angle Limit 
 
 
 RC Test Values 
Value Meaning 
0 Test Complete 
1 Resistive Test 
2 Capacitive Test 
-1 Low Secondary Voltage Error 
-2 SQ300 Halted 
 
 
 Trigger Type 
Value Meaning 
0 Free Run 
1 Zero Cross 
2 Spark 
3 SCR Fire 
4 Reserved 
 
 
 Custom Flash Type 
Value Meaning 
0 Standard 
1 3 Phase 
2 750 Primary Voltage Scale 
3 Hybrid Board 3 Phase 
4 Hybrid Board Single Phase 
5 400 Hz Inverter 
 
 
 KV Limit Type 
Value Meaning 
0 Average 
1 Peak 
2 Both Average and Peak 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
159
 
 
Value Expansion IO Type 
< 0 None 
0 Beckhoff 
1 B&W Remote I/O 
2 Adam 
 
 
 Power Restore State 
Value Meaning 
0 Last Known Good State 
1 Halted 
 
 
 Aux Contact 
Value Meaning 
0 OFF 
1 Rapper Output 1 
2 Rapper Output 2 
3 Rapper Output 3 
4 Rapper Output 4 
5 Alarm Output 
6 Run Output 
7 Software Controlled 
8 Horn Output 1 
9 Horn Output 2 
10 Horn Output 3 
11 Horn Output 4 
12 Heater Output 1 
13 Heater Output 2 
14 Heater Output 3 
15 Heater Output 4 
16 Standby Mode 
17 Contactor Control 
 
 
 Hybrid Board Type 
Value Meaning 
0 Hybrid Board 3 Phase 
1 Hybrid Board Single Phase 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
160
The Optional Operator Interface 
Introduction 
The SQ-300®i Operator Interface is an optional component of the SQ-300i Hybrid control system. 
For this reason, the Operator Interface is shipped in a separate package, instead of shipping with 
the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller. 
 
 
SQ-300i Operator Interface Features 
Communication between the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and the operator may occur at the optional 
Operator Interface. This unit runs Microsoft® Windows® 7 (SP1) Embedded operating system, and 
a proprietary software application (SQControl) that allows one interface to manage and display the 
operation for up to 20 SQ-300i Microcontrollers. 
 
B&W’s touch-screen Operator Interface component offers a large, color display, with ample room 
for displaying data, trending, waveforms and the navigation controls necessary to view and edit all 
of the required settings for the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller. The Operator Interface has a 12-inch 
display that provides 800 x 600 resolution. This panel is generally mounted in a cutout on the 
outside of the electrical cabinet door. If B&W has installed the Operator Interface on the AVC 
cabinet, no further installation/wiring is required. 
 
If the Operator Interface does not ship as part of an AVC cabinet, it will be shipped with an optional 
power supply. This power supply is required to energize the display. 
 
 
Installing the SQ-300i Operator Interface 
SQ-300i Operator Interface installation is typically performed by trained B&W Field Service 
Technicians. However, in some cases, the plant may choose to install the SQ-300i Operator 
Interface. This section will provide instructions on how to install the SQ-300i Operator Interface. If 
you have questions concerning the installation, please contact your B&W representative. 
 
Before installing the SQ-300i Operator Interface: 
 
• Refer to the safety notices located in the front of this manual. 
• Consult with your company’s IT or Network Administration before making any 
modifications to the corporate network or ordering any parts to connect to the network. 
 
The SQ-300i is fully capable of communicating with a remote or local device, or operating in a 
communications network through a standard Ethernet connection using Modbus TCP/IP 
(Ethernet) communication. 
 
 
If you connect the Operator Interface to a switch or router that provides 
power over Ethernet (POE), make sure that the switch or router is 802.3af 
compliant. Failure to use a compliant device may result in damage to the 
Operator Interface. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
161
Si vous connectez l'interface opérateur à un commutateur ou routeur qui 
fournit Power over Ethernet (POE), assurez-vous que le commutateur ou 
routeur est 802.3af. Ne pas utiliser un périphérique compatible peut 
entraîner des dommages à l'interface opérateur. 
Si conecta la interfaz de operador a un switch o router que proporciona 
alimentación a través de Ethernet (POE), asegúrese de que el switch o 
router es compatible con 802.3af. Si no se utiliza un dispositivo 
compatible puede provocar daños a la interfaz del operador. 
 
Operator Interface Installation Requirements 
Location Requirements 
The SQ-300i Operator Interface is intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of 
protection against contact with its enclosed circuitry and against a limited amount of falling dirt. The 
Operator Interface is typically mounted in a cutout on the outside of the electrical cabinet door. 
 
Communication Requirements 
The Operator Interface will be connected using Ethernet cabling, switches and/or routers 
appropriate for the environment. If a short cable run (of less than 10 feet) will connect the Operator 
Interface to a network switch, a patch cable assembly should be used. If a long cable run is 
required (for distances from 10 feet to 300 feet) you should use a riser cable assembly. 
Recommended parts and tools for each of these cable types are included in Communications 
Networks section. Using parts other than the recommended parts may have a negative impact on 
communication and operation. 
 
Please consult your local IT department for plant specific network wiring requirements. 
 
The Operator Interface is shipped with the following default IP address: 
 
IP address: 192.168.1.254 
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 
 
Power and Environmental Requirements 
For Power and Environmental requirements, please refer to the Specifications section of this 
manual. 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
162
Parts/Tools Required for Installation 
Before you begin, check to make sure you have the proper parts and tools. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
* The bezels will be required only if you are replacing the 8700700-001B Operator Interface.The 
cabinet cutout that was made for that operator interface is too large for this model (8700700-001C) 
to fit securely. 
 
 
Mounting Procedure (New installation) 
As discussed previously, the best location for the Operator Interface is in a cutout on the outside of 
the electrical cabinet door. 
 
1. Install the green power connector to the bottom of the operator interface. 
a. Slide the male end of the connector into the green power input receptacle on the Operator 
Interface. 
b. Tighten the two captive screws to secure the adapter. 
 
2. Using the mounting cutout provided (7993411), follow these steps: 
a. Make sure that you have enough room for the cutout and for the required front and rear 
clearances (noted on the template). 
b. Cut a 12.280” (W) x 9.820” (H) opening in the cabinet door to mount the Operator Interface. 
 
3. Mount the Operator Interface as follows: 
a. Slide the Operator Interface (back-first) into the opening from the outside. (Maintain a 
secure hold on the front of the Operator Interface, or have someone else hold the Operator 
Interface in place before proceeding.) 
b. Working from the back of the Operator Interface, install and secure each of the six 
mounting anchors as follows: 
(1) Partially thread one of the 1¼” screws provided into each of the mounting anchors. 
(This will make it easier to install and secure the anchors.) Refer to Figure 1. 
 
 
 
Parts 
Qty Description 
1 Operator Interface 
1 Operator Interface power supply 
1 Inner Bezel* 
1 Outer Bezel* 
1 Green power connector 
6 Mounting anchors 
6 1 ¼“ mounting anchor screws 
 
Tools 
Qty Description 
1 Phillips-head screwdriver 
1 Small flat-head screwdriver 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
163
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(2) Starting with one of the anchors on the top of the interface, slide the anchor into the 
slots as shown in Figure 2. Then rotate the anchor back toward you until the anchor is 
in position and the head of the screw is perpendicular to the back of the interface. 
(3) Hold the anchor in place and tighten the screw securely to the metal cabinet facing. 
(4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the next anchor on the top of the interface. 
(5) Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the remaining four anchors on the sides of the interface. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Figure 2 
Figure 1 
Slots for 
mounting 
anchor 
Top 
mounting 
anchor 
Top 
mounting 
anchor 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
164
Mounting Procedure (Replacement for 8700700-001B) 
As discussed previously, the best location for the Operator Interface is in a cutout on the outside of 
the electrical cabinet door. For this installation, you will need to use the supplied bezels. 
 
1. Remove the protective covering from the front side of the outer bezel. 
 
2. Install the green power connector to the bottom of the Operator Interface. 
a. Slide the male end of the connector into the green power input receptacle on the Operator 
Interface. 
b. Tighten the two captive screws to secure the adapter. 
 
3. Refer to Figure 3 and mount the Operator Interface as follows: 
a. Slide the outer bezel (the piece with rounded corners) onto the back of the Operator 
Interface. 
b. Slide the Operator Interface and bezel (back-first) into the cabinet (panel) opening from the 
outside. (Have someone else hold the Operator Interface in place before proceeding.) 
 
Figure 3 
 
c. Working from the back of the Operator Interface, slide the inner bezel (the piece with the 
square corners) onto the back of the Operator Interface. 
d. Again working from the back of the Operator Interface, install and secure each of the six 
mounting anchors as follows: 
i. Partially thread one of the 1¼” screws provided into each of the mounting anchors. 
(This will make it easier to install and secure the anchors.) Refer to Figure 1. 
ii. Starting with one of the anchors on the top of the interface, slide the anchor into the 
slots as shown in Figure 2. Then rotate the anchor back toward you until the 
anchor is in position and the head of the screw is perpendicular to the back of the 
interface. 
iii. Hold the anchor in place and tighten the screw securely to the metal cabinet facing. 
iv. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the next anchor on the top of the interface. 
v. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the remaining four anchors on the sides of the 
interface. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
165
Connection Procedure 
Once the Operator Interface has been mounted, refer to the installation drawings and follow the 
procedure below to connect the interface to the power supply and the network. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – Do not apply power until all installation and wiring is 
complete! 
AVERTISSEMENT - Ne pas appliquer la puissance jusqu'à ce que 
toute l'installation et le câblage est terminé! 
ADVERTENCIA - No aplicar energía hasta que todo la instalación y el 
cableado está completo! 
 
1. Select the proper voltage range on the power supply. 
2. Mount the power supply to a rail inside the cabinet. 
3. Use customer-supplied wire (as specified) to run plant power to the power supply. 
4. Use customer-supplied wire (as specified) to connect the power supply to the green power 
connector on the Operator Interface. Refer to Figure 4. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Configuration Procedure 
Once the Operator Interface has been fully installed, you will need to configure it to work with the 
SQ-300i Hybrid controller. Please refer to the Configuring the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller and 
Operator Interface section. 
 
 
 
+24V 
24V Return 
G 
 
Figure 4 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
166
The Optional Auxiliary Display 
Introduction 
The SQ-300®i Auxiliary Display is an optional component of the SQ-300i Hybrid control system. 
For this reason, the Auxiliary Display is shipped in a separate package, instead of shipping with the 
SQ-300i Hybrid Controller. 
 
The optional Auxiliary Display is a simple, low-cost alternative for local monitoring and control of the 
SQ-300i Hybrid. This display may be the best solution for your plant, particularly if you do most of 
your work with the SQ-300i Hybrid remotely (via SQControl and Precipitator Manager), but still 
need some basic control at the local level. With the Auxiliary Display, you’ll be able to view the 
basic operating parameters and halt and run the control right at the AVC cabinet. 
 
B&W’s Auxiliary Display component is a compact, color touch-screen display, with ample room for 
essential data readings, navigation controls, and Halt/Run controls. The Auxiliary Display has a 
4.3-inch screen that provides 480 x 272 resolution. Special features include password protection 
(to prevent unauthorized Halt/Run control), and a language selection screen. 
 
 
Installing the Auxiliary Display 
SQ-300i Auxiliary Display installation is typically performed by trained B&W Field Service 
Technicians. However, in some cases, the plant may choose to install the SQ-300i Auxiliary 
Display. This manual will provide instructions on how to install the SQ-300i Auxiliary Display. If you 
have questions concerning the installation, please contact your B&W representative. 
 
Before installing the SQ-300i Auxiliary Display: 
 
• Refer to the safety notices located in the front of this manual. 
 
Location Requirements 
The SQ-300i Auxiliary Display is intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection 
against contact with its enclosed circuitry and against a limited amount of falling dirt. The Auxiliary 
Display is typically mounted in a cutout on the electrical cabinet door. The power supplyfor the 
display is typically mounted on a din rail inside the cabinet. 
 
Communication Requirements 
Since the Auxiliary Display will be connected directly to the SQ-300i Hybrid, it can simply be 
connected using two wires. (B&W recommends using Omni Cable #G12202 or equivalent.) 
 
Power and Environmental Requirements 
For Power and Environmental requirements, please refer to the Specifications section of this 
manual. 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
167
Parts Required 
Before you begin, check to make sure you received the proper parts. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Parts 
Qty Description 
1 Auxiliary Display 
1 Serial termination adapter 
1 3-position terminal block 
1 Auxiliary Display power supply (with din rail and 2 end caps) 
Serial termination adapter for 
communication 
Gasket 
Slots for 
mounting 
clamp 
Slots for 
mounting 
clamp 
Auxiliary Display 
Terminal block for 
power connection 
Power Supply with din 
rail and end caps 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
168
Installation Diagram 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
169
Mounting Procedure 
Please refer to the installation diagram on the previous page before beginning the installation 
process. As discussed previously, the best location for the Auxiliary Display is in a cutout on the 
outside of the electrical cabinet door. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – Disconnect and lock out all power before opening 
the cabinet to begin the installation. 
AVERTISSEMENT – Débranchez et verrouillez toutes les 
alimentations avant d'ouvrir l'armoire et commencer l'installation. 
ADVERTENCIA – Desconecte todas las fuentes de energía antes de 
abrir el armario y empezar la instalación. 
 
 
 
1. Install the green 3-position terminal block on the back of the Auxiliary Display. 
a. Slide the female end of the terminal block onto the green power connector on the Auxiliary 
Display. 
b. Tighten the two captive screws to secure the terminal block. 
 
2. Mount the power supply in the cabinet. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – Use only the power supply that was suppli ed with 
the Auxiliary Display. Using a different type of p ower supply 
could cause permanent damage to the display. 
AVERTISSEMENT – Utilisez uniquement les adaptateurs 
d'alimentation fournis avec l'écran auxiliaire. Utiliser un autre type 
d'alimentation pourrait causer des dommages permanents à l'écran. 
ADVERTENCIA – Use solamente la fuente de poder suministrada con 
la pantalla (HMI). Si usa una fuente de poder de diferent tipo puede 
causar un daño permanente a la pantalla (HMI). 
 
a. You may mount the power supply on existing din rail, if available. Otherwise, install the 
supplied din rail. 
(1) Find an appropriate location on the panel, and then hold the din rail in place to mark the 
holes for drilling. 
(2) Drill holes. 
(3) Re-position the din rail and mount it using appropriate hardware. 
b. Pull the top din rail latch out and attach the top of the power supply to the rail. 
c. Pull the bottom din rail latch out and attach the bottom of the power supply to the rail. 
d. Install an end cap on either side of the power supply to secure it in place. 
 
3. Using the Auxiliary Display cutout template provided (7993418), follow these steps: 
a. Select a location on the cabinet. Make sure that you have enough room for the cutout plus 
at least one inch of clearance on each side of the display for mounting hardware. 
(Consider the clearance needed for cable connections on the rear of the display as well.) 
b. Cut a 4.69” (W) x 3.66” (H) opening in the cabinet door to mount the Auxiliary Display. 
 
4. Prepare the mounting clamps for use. 
a. Partially thread one of the 1¼” screws provided into each of the mounting clamps. Make 
sure that the end of the screw does not extend beyond the hole. (Refer to Figure 1.) 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
170
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5. Mount the Auxiliary Display as follows: 
a. Make sure that the gasket is installed on the display. 
b. Working from the outside of the cabinet, slide the Auxiliary Display (back-first) into the 
cabinet opening. (Maintain a secure hold on the front of the Auxiliary Display, or have 
someone else hold the Auxiliary Display in place before proceeding.) 
c. Working from the back of the Auxiliary Display, install and secure each of the four mounting 
clamps: 
(1) Starting with one of the clamps on the top of the display, slide the clamp into the 
slots. Then rotate the clamp back toward you until the clamp is in position and the 
head of the screw is parallel to the back of the interface as shown in Figure 2. 
 
 
 
(2) Hold the clamp in place and tighten the screw securely to the metal cabinet facing. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – The screws should be snug, but do not ove r-tighten. 
Over tightening could damage the display. 
AVERTISSEMENT – les vis doivent être bien serrées, mais sans trop 
les serrer. Un serrage excessif pourrait endommager l'écran. 
ADVERTENCIA – Los tornillos deben quedar bien seguros pero no 
los ajuste demasiado. Si los ajusta demasiado pueden dañar la 
pantalla (HMI). 
 
 
(3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the next clamp on the top of the display. 
(4) Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the remaining two clamps on the bottom of the display. 
 
The screw is flush 
with the edge of the 
clamp. 
Figure 1 
Figure 2 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
171
6. Install the green serial termination adapter on the bottom of the Auxiliary Display. 
a. Slide the female end of the adapter into the silver serial port on the Auxiliary Display. 
b. Tighten the two captive screws to secure the adapter. 
 
 
Connection Procedure 
Once the Auxiliary Display has been mounted, refer to the installation diagram and follow the 
procedure below to connect the display to the power supply and to the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – Do not apply power until all installation and wiring is 
complete! 
AVERTISSEMENT – ne branchez pas l'alimentation avant la fin 
complète de l'installation et du câblage ! 
ADVERTENCIA – No aplique energía hasta que todo el cableado se 
haya terminado. 
 
5. Create a power cable using customer-supplied wire (as specified). 
6. Connect the power cable to the terminal block on the Auxiliary Display. 
7. Connect the other end of the power cable to the power supply. 
8. Use customer-supplied wire to run plant power to the power supply. 
9. Use customer-supplied serial cable to connect the serial termination adapter on the Auxiliary 
Display to the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
 
After all of the connections are complete, you should be ready to close the cabinet and apply 
power. 
 
 
Configuration Procedure 
In order for the Auxiliary Display to operate properly, you must select it using the SQControl or 
Precipitator Manager software. (This is a simple Yes or No setting in the software.) For more 
details, please refer to the Communications Settings section in this manual, or the Setup 
SQ-300i/Communication Settings section of the Precipitator Manager Manual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
172
Operating the SQ-300i Hybrid Auxiliary Display 
This section provides an overview of the screens, navigation controls, Halt/Run controls, and the 
messages that may appear on the display. The display screens have been reproduced to help you 
become familiar with them. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – If you remove power from the display,wai t ten 
seconds before re-applying power (to prevent possib le damage 
to the display). 
AVERTISSEMENT : Si vous débranchez l'alimentation de l'écran, 
attendez dix secondes avant de rebrancher (pour éviter 
d'endommager l'écran). 
ADVERTENCIA – SI remueve la energía de la pantalla (HMI) espere 
10 segundos antes de volver a aplicarle energía. Esto previene de 
posibles daños a la pantalla. 
 
 
The Main Screen 
When the Auxiliary Display initiates, the Main screen is the first to appear. This screen displays the 
key electrical operating values and limit values for the SQ-300i Hybrid, as well as any limit or alarm 
messages. 
 
 
Key operating 
values 
Navigation 
controls 
Halt/Run 
controls 
Status and 
alarm 
messages 
Field A 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
173
The key electrical operating values are as follows: 
 
Parameter Description 
Primary Voltage: True RMS primary voltage is displayed as Volts AC, and is updated at 
spark, arc, or limit. 
Primary Current: True RMS primary current is displayed as Amps AC, and is updated at 
spark, arc, or limit. 
KV Average: Average secondary voltage is displayed as KV DC, and is updated at 
spark, arc, or limit. 
Secondary Current: Secondary current is displayed as mA DC, and is updated at spark, 
arc, or limit. 
SCR Firing Angle: The SCR firing angle is displayed in degrees, and is updated at spark, 
arc, or limit. 
Output Power The real time rate of power usage is displayed in KW, and is updated 
continuously. 
Spark Rate: The actual spark rate, in sparks per minute, updated once every 
minute. 
 
For navigation and control 
• Press the Next button to move to the next Operation screen (the Security and Languages 
screen). 
• Press the Back button to move to the previous Operation screen (the Password screen, if 
available, or the Security and Languages screen). 
• Press the Halt button to halt the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
• Press the Run button to start the SQ-300i Hybrid. (This button will appear if Security is turned 
off, or if Security is turned on, and someone is logged in. If Security is on and no one is logged 
in, the screen will prompt you to Enter Correct Password. See the Login screen for more 
details.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
174
The Security and Languages Screen 
The Security and Languages screen allows you to turn these features on and off. 
 
 
To change the status of security and language featu res 
• Press the Yes/No field to change the status of these features. 
o When Yes is displayed, security and languages are on. Some actions (including 
changing this setting and running the control) will require a valid login, and 
language selection will be available. 
o When No is displayed, security and languages are off. The following screens will 
no longer be available: Language screen, Login screen, and Password screen. 
You will not be able to change the display language, and you will not be required to 
log in. 
 
For navigation and control 
• Press the Next button to move to the next Operation screen (the Language screen, if available, 
or the Main screen). 
• Press the Back button to move to the previous Operation screen (the Main screen). 
• Press the Halt button to halt the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
• Press the Run button to start the SQ-300i Hybrid. (This button will appear if Security is turned 
off, or if Security is turned on, and someone is logged in. If Security is on and no one is logged 
in, the screen will prompt you to Enter Correct Password. See the Login screen for more 
details.) 
 
 
On/off control 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
175
The Language Screen 
The Language screen gives you the option of selecting another language for the display. The 
Auxiliary Display supports the following languages: English, Spanish, French, German, 
Portuguese, Russian, and Chinese. 
 
 
 
To change the display language 
• If the Language screen is not currently visible, turn the Security and Languages feature on. 
(See Security and Languages screen.) 
• Press any one of the flag images to select a new language for the display. 
 
For navigation and control 
• Press the Next button to move to the next Operation screen (the Login screen). 
• Press the Back button to move to the previous Operation screen (the Security and Languages 
screen). 
• Press the Halt button to halt the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
• Press the Run button to start the SQ-300i Hybrid. (This button will appear if Security is turned 
off, or if Security is turned on, and someone is logged in. If Security is on and no one is logged 
in, the screen will prompt you to Enter Correct Password. See the Login screen for more 
details.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Press any flag to 
select a new 
language 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
176
The Login Screen 
The Login screen allows you to sign onto the display (which will give you access to the Run 
function). You may also log out (which will secure the display from unauthorized changes). 
 
 
 
The Auxiliary Display is pre-programmed with a User login and password. This security measure 
provides access to Run the control. The default/safe password will be given to the operator at the 
time of installation. 
 
The Auxiliary display now includes a timeout feature. After 10 minutes, the display will 
automatically log off. 
 
To log in to the display 
• If the Login screen is not currently visible, turn the Security and Languages feature on. (See 
Security and Languages screen.) 
• Press the User field to select a User level. 
• A keypad screen will appear. Press the number 1 and then press Enter . 
• Press the Password field to enter a password. 
• A keypad screen will appear. Enter the User 1 password and then press Enter . 
 
If you entered a valid User level and Password, you will now have permission to Run the control. 
You will also be allowed to enter the password administration screen. (See the Password screen.) 
If your entry is invalid, you will not have permission to run the control from the Auxiliary Display. 
 
� 
 
• As long as you are logged in, Run control will remain available. To 
maintain the security of the system, manually log out before leaving 
the Auxiliary Display. (See Log Off.) 
 
 
 
 
Enter a valid 
User level and 
password for 
the ability to 
Run the control. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
177
To log off of the display 
• Press the User field to select a User level. 
• A keypad screen will appear. Press the number 1 and then press Enter . 
• Press the Password field to enter a password. 
• A keypad screen will appear. Enter an incorrect password and then press Enter . 
 
Run control at the display will now be locked. You may still view the readings on the Main screen or 
change languages (if available), but you will not be allowed to Run the AVC from the Auxiliary 
Display until a new, valid login is entered. 
 
 
For navigation and control 
• Press the Next button to move to the next Operation screen (the Password screen). 
• Press the Back button to move to the previous Operation screen (the Language screen). 
• Press the Halt button to halt the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
• Press the Run button to start the SQ-300i Hybrid. (This button will appear if Security is turned 
off, or if Security is turned on, and someone is logged in. If Security is on and no one is logged 
in, the screen will prompt you to Enter Correct Password. See the Login screen for more 
details.)© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
178
 
The Password Screen 
The Password screen allows you to edit the User password if you are logged in. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
When the Password screen appears, you may edit the password if the User password field is 
highlighted. (If the User password field is not highlighted, you are not logged in and you may not 
change the password.) 
 
To change a password 
• If the Password screen is not currently visible, turn the Security and Languages feature on. 
(See Security and Languages screen.) 
• You may need to log in. (See the Login screen.) 
• Press the highlighted User field to edit the password. 
• A keypad screen will appear. Enter a new password and then press Enter . 
 
For navigation and control 
• Press the Next button to move to the next Operation screen (the Main screen). 
• Press the Back button to move to the previous Operation screen (the Login screen). 
• Press the Halt button to halt the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
• Press the Run button to start the SQ-300i Hybrid. (This button will appear if Security is turned 
off, or if Security is turned on, and someone is logged in. If Security is on and no one is logged 
in, the screen will prompt you to Enter Correct Password. See the Login screen for more 
details.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This 
highlighted 
field may be 
edited. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
179
Auxiliary Display Status and Alarm Messages 
Each of the screens on the Auxiliary Display includes a message field that will display one of over 
20 status and alarm messages. 
 
• To clear an alarm using the Auxiliary Display, press the Halt button on the display screen, and 
then press the Run button to restart the control. 
 
Please refer to the main Status and Alarm Messages section for complete details and a list of 
possible messages. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
180
SQDiscover Software 
Introduction 
The SQDiscover software is a utility that ships with SQControl. It is used to identify any SQ-300i 
control on the network by IP address and MAC address. It is also used for initial configuration of the 
SQ-300i Hybrid controller. 
 
In order to use SQDiscover software, you will also need the following: 
 
• Desktop or laptop computer with the Microsoft Windows operating system (version XP or 
later) or an Operator Interface 
• Ethernet connection to the control network 
 
 
About the Search and Identification Process 
When SQDiscover is started, it performs as follows: 
 
• SQDiscover sends a broadcast message out over the network. 
• Any Ethernet-connected SQ-300i Hybrid Controller that can receive the message will respond 
with its MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, control type, and control name. 
• If there are multiple controls on the network with the same IP address, SQDiscover will display 
them all. 
This can be a valuable trouble-shooting tool. Each of the controls on the network must have a 
unique IP address for the system to operate properly. SQDiscover will indicate if this is not the 
case, giving you the opportunity to fix the problem. 
 
 
About the Change Options 
SQDiscover provides the ability to make several changes to new SQ-300i Hybrid controls: 
 
• Use the Change Control Name feature to simply change the name of the control. 
• Use the Re-program IP Address/Subnet Mask feature if you need to change the IP address and 
subnet mask. For example, if you are adding a new control to the system, you may install the 
control on the network (using its default address and subnet), then use SQDiscover to find it. 
Once you find the control, use the Re-program feature to enter the network-compatible IP 
address and subnet. 
• Use the Reset Control to Factory Defaults option only in critical situations. For example, if the 
control is unable to recover from an error condition, or if the control profile is corrupt, you may 
decide to use this feature. 
The Reset feature does several things. It resets all of the settings and configuration options, 
including all TR set parameters on SQ-300i Hybrid controls. It also resets the IP address, 
subnet mask, and the control name, as follows: 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
181
Reset Values 
IP Address 192.168.1.2 
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 
Name (SQi) SQi-xxxx (where xxxx is the last 4 digits of the MAC address) 
 
If you use the Reset feature, you may initially lose communication with the control. Once you 
find the control again, you must re-program the IP address and subnet mask, and re-enter all of 
the control settings (as needed). 
• The Set Line Voltage Calibration option is useful on the original 2-piece SQ-300i controls. (This 
setting is not needed for Hybrid controls because the control reads the voltage directly.). 
• Use the Lock Digital Input feature to tell the SQ-300i Hybrid control what the “normal” operating 
states are for each of the inputs. You should use this feature if (1) you are using optional digital 
input hardware to trigger alarms and (2) some of your inputs are on or high during normal 
operation. Once you lock the normal status for the inputs, any status change at one of the 
inputs will trigger an alarm and halt the control. 
 
 
Important Notes 
Please be aware of the following: 
 
• SQDiscover will not run on the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system (or on earlier 
operating systems). 
• If you are using the Microsoft Windows 7 operating system, you must make sure that the 
program is running as an administrator for all users in order for the program to work properly. 
(Please refer to the instructions for Configuring SQDiscover.) 
• SQDiscover cannot search through a gateway to another network. If your system has multiple 
control networks, the search and identification process must be conducted on each network. 
• In order to function properly, your network must allow UDP communications between the 
computer and the controls. If your network or firewall selectively (or totally) blocks UDP 
communications, you must set your firewall to allow UDP communications on ports 11864 and 
11865. 
• The Reset Control to Factory Defaults option can cause additional complications and should 
only be used as a last resort. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
182
Configuring and Starting SQDiscover 
In most cases, running SQDiscover is a very quick and easy task. You can run SQDiscover directly 
from the computer hard drive or Operator Interface (if it has already been installed). There are a 
couple of situations that will require some additional work: 
 
• If the software isn’t already on the hard drive, you can do this in a few simple steps. 
• If you are using the Microsoft Windows 7 operating system, you will need to check/edit 
the program properties. 
To transfer the software to the computer hard drive 
1. Insert the thumb drive (containing your software or master installer) into an available USB port. 
2. Find the SQDiscover.exe file. 
3. Right-click on the file and select Copy . 
4. If you are using Precipitator Manager, navigate to the following location: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\Babcock & Wilcox\B&W Precipitator\Utilities] 
 
If you are using one of the older programs like WinDAC or WinRAP, navigate to the following 
location: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\BW PGG\ Utilities] 
 
� 
• If you are running an older, 32-bit version of the operating system, the 
file paths above will start with the Program Files folder as opposed to 
the Program Files (x86)folder. 
 
5. Right-click and select Paste from the menu. 
 
 
To transfer the software to an Operator Interface 
1. Prepare to access the Operator Interface. 
 
 
• WARNING – Follow safety instructions and disconnect all power 
before opening the cabinet! 
 
2. Disconnect all power and open the AVC cabinet. 
3. Locate an available USB port on the Operator Interface and insert the thumb drive. Make sure 
the thumb drive is secure. 
4. Carefully close and lock the cabinet door. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
183
5. Reapply power to the AVC cabinet. 
6. Find the SQDiscover.exe file in the drive representing the thumb drive. 
7. Right-click on the file and select Copy . 
8. Navigate to the following location: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\BW PGG\Utilities]§ 
9. Right-click and select Paste . 
10. Prepare to access the Operator Interface again. 
 
• WARNING – Follow safety instructions and disconnect all power 
before opening the cabinet! 
 
11. Disconnect all power and open the AVC cabinet. 
12. Locate and remove the thumb drive. 
13. Close and lock the cabinet door. 
14. Reapply power to the AVC cabinet. 
To configure the program to function on a computer with the Microsoft  Windows  7 
operating system 
1. Find the SQDiscover.exe file on the hard drive in one of the following locations. 
If you are using Precipitator Manager, navigate to: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\Babcock & Wilcox\B&W Precipitator\Utilities] 
 
If you are using one of the older programs like WinDAC or WinRAP, navigate to: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\BW PGG\ Utilities] 
 
2. Right-click on the file and select Properties , then select the Compatibility tab. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
184
3. Press the Change 
settings for all users 
button (near the bottom 
of the dialog). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4. 
5. In the Privilege level section, put a 
check mark in the box. 
6. When you’re finished, press the 
Apply button, then the OK button 
(and then OK again). 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
185
To run the software from a computer 
1. Make sure the computer is connected to the control network via Ethernet. 
2. Start the Microsoft Windows operating system. 
3. Find and double-click SQDiscover.exe . 
If you are using Precipitator Manager, navigate to: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\Babcock & Wilcox\B&W Precipitator\Utilities]§ 
If you are using one of the older programs like WinDAC or WinRAP, navigate to: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\BW PGG\Utilities]§ 
 
4. The first time you run SQDiscover, you will be asked to input a new password. 
Passwords must be between 6 and 16 
characters in length, must include 
both upper- and lower-case letters, 
and must include at least one numeric 
character and at least one punctuation 
symbol. 
• Enter your password in the New 
Password field, then enter it again 
in the Confirm field. 
 
• Press OK to save the password and continue, or press Cancel to exit program startup. 
5. The next time you run SQDiscover, you will be asked to enter your current password. 
• Enter your password in the 
Current Password field. 
• Press OK to save the password 
and continue, or press Cancel to 
exit program startup. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
186
To run the software from an Operator Interface 
1. Make sure the Operator Interface is connected to the control network via Ethernet. 
2. If the SQControl software is running, shut it down (and select Exit to Windows). 
3. Find and double-click SQDiscover.exe . (To explore, use the Start menu, a desktop icon, or 
your toolbar.) 
Navigate to: 
[C:\Program Files (x86)\Babcock & Wilcox\B&W Precipitator\Utilities]§ 
4. The first time you run SQDiscover, you will be asked to input a new password. 
Passwords must be between 6 and 16 
characters in length, must include 
both upper- and lower-case letters, 
and must include at least one numeric 
character and at least one punctuation 
symbol. 
• To access a keypad, touch the 
field where you need to enter text 
and hold until you see a circle 
appear. When you remove your 
finger, the keypad icon should 
appear. Click that to open the keypad. 
• Enter your password in the New Password field, then enter it again in the Confirm field. 
• Press OK to save the password and continue, or press Cancel to exit program startup. 
5. The next time you run SQDiscover, you will be asked to enter your current password. 
• Enter your password in the 
Current Password field. 
• Press OK to save the password 
and continue, or press Cancel to 
exit program startup. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
187
Operating SQDiscover 
After starting SQDiscover, the software should automatically begin displaying the controls it has 
found on the network. For each SQ-300i Hybrid control, the program should display all of the 
identifiers shown in the image below. 
 
 
 
 
� 
• If you are about to add an SQ-300®i Hybrid AVC to the system, 
ensure that the correct type is listed in the Sub-Type column. The 
sub-type indicates if the AVC has the firmware to control a 
single-phase or a 3-phase T/R set. It is critical that the Sub-Type 
matches your application. If you think the Sub-Type is incorrect, 
please contact B&W for support. 
 
SQDiscover lists all of the 
Ethernet-connected controls 
it can find on the network. 
The Refresh button 
starts a new search. 
A right-click menu provides 
additional options for your 
controls. 
Double-check the 
Sub-Type for 
Hybrid controls 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
188
To start a new search 
1. Press the Refresh button. 
SQDiscover will start a new search on the control network the computer is connected to. 
 
To access the right-click menu on an Operator Inter face 
1. Touch the line that represents the control you need to work with and hold until you see a circle 
appear. When you remove your finger, the right-click menu should appear. 
2. Touch the option you wish to select. 
 
To re-program the IP address or subnet mask 
1. Right-click on the control, then select Re-program IP Address/Subnet Mask . 
 
2. Enter new identifiers in the IP Address and 
Subnet Mask fields as needed. 
3. Press the OK button to save changes and 
exit this dialog. 
4. Press the Cancel button to exit without 
saving. 
 
 
To change the control name 
1. Right-click on the control, then select Change Control Name . 
 
2. Enter a new name for the control. 
3. Press the OK button to save changes and 
exit this dialog. 
4. Press the Cancel button to exit without 
saving. 
 
 
To reset the control to factory defaults 
1. Right-click on the control, then select Reset Control to Factory Defaults . 
You will receive the following warning: 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
189
 
2. Read the entire warning message. If you still want to reset the control, click the I have read the 
warning and understand the risks involved check box and then press Continue . 
3. Press the Cancel button to exit without resetting control. 
 
To lock the digital input normal status 
1. Make sure that you are signed in as the Administrator and the control is halted. 
2. Make sure that all of your digital inputs are in their normalstates for your application. (After all 
of the inputs have been properly wired and assigned, you may check the sixth Operate screen 
in SQControl, or the Digital Inputs/Outputs tab on the Remote screen in Precipitator Manager to 
review the Off or On status of each of the digital inputs. If all of the inputs are in their normal 
state, you may proceed.) 
3. Right-click on the control, then select Lock Digital Input Normal State . You will receive a 
confirmation message. 
4. Press OK when done. 
 
 
 
 
 
To exit SQDiscover 
1. Click on the “X” in the top right corner of the main dialog. 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
190
SQControl OPC Server 
Introduction 
OPC is a set of standards for industrial automation and enterprise systems. The SQControl OPC 
Server is an add-on program that ships with SQControl software. This software module enables an 
external OPC client to obtain real-time process data from our SQControl software and to push data 
or commands back to our controls. 
 
The SQControl OPC Server, acting as a middleman, enables the following to occur: 
• SQControl can send data from each SQ-300i Hybrid to an external OPC client. 
• SQControl can send data from an NWL PowerPlus™ control to an external OPC client. 
• The external OPC client can send commands through SQControl to the SQ-300i Hybrid or 
NWL PowerPlus™ control. 
 
The data and commands transferred between the OPC client and the OPC server are called tags. 
When SQControl OPC Server is running, any OPC client can connect to the SQControl OPC server 
and subscribe to, or access, the tags through the Windows operating system. For more 
information on tags, please refer to the SQControl Tags and the B&W OPC Browser sections. 
 
� 
 
• The SQControl OPC Server is available with SQControl software 
versions 2.8.0.3 and later. 
 
 
Critical System Notes 
Every plant computer system and network is different. This section includes information that is 
critical to proper operation. Please review this section carefully. 
 
About SQControl OPC Server Setup… 
To implement this functionality, the following conditions must be met: 
• The computer running SQControl and the SQControl OPC Server must be part of a domain. 
Any computer with an OPC client that connects to the SQControl OPC server module must be 
a part of the same domain. (If the domain configuration is unacceptable, a third-party tunneling 
software will be required.) 
• SQControl must be running in order for SQControl OPC Server to send data to or receive 
commands from an external client. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
191
About OPC Client Setup… 
To implement this functionality, the following OPC client conditions must be met: 
• The computer running SQControl and the SQControl OPC Server must be part of a domain. 
Any computer with an OPC client that connects to the SQControl OPC server module must be 
a part of the same domain. (If the domain configuration is unacceptable, a third-party tunneling 
software will be required.) 
• Your OPC client must be configured with one of the following Microsoft® Windows® operating 
system-level services for inter-process communications: 
• COM (Component Object Model) – used when both OPC client and server are on the same 
computer 
• DCOM (Distributed COM) – used when an OPC server and client(s) are on different 
computers 
Consult with your in-house network support personnel for help setting up inter-process 
communications or network security. 
For more information on how DCOM works and how to configure it, please refer to the following 
resource on the subject: http://www.opcconnect.com/dcomcnfg.php 
• Your OPC client must be connected to the SQControl OPC Server, and you must subscribe to 
the SQControl OPC server tags with your OPC client system. Refer to your OPC client vendor 
documentation for instructions. 
Before Starting the SQControl OPC Server… 
Before configuring the OPC server module, please be aware of the following: 
• In order for B&W software to operate properly, the logged-in account must have the standard 
permissions defined by Microsoft for "User" level access. The program data directory (where 
our programs will store file-based settings and private data) and ALL of its subdirectories must 
have both Read and Write privileges. (The program data directory location will vary based on 
operating system. See our Notes section for specific details.) 
Corporate network security policies may impose more restrictive limits on "User" level access 
for these directory trees. If this is the case for your network, you may see "Access denied" error 
messages or the programs may fail at startup. If you see these errors, you must either log into 
the computer with an "Administrator" level login, or you must have your network administrator 
adjust the network policies for your computer to give Read/Write access to User level logins for 
these directory trees. 
 
• Before you run the SQControl OPC Server, you need to install and configure the SQControl 
software, test all of the SQ-300i Hybrid controls, and test all of your analog and digital I/O. (If 
you make any configuration changes to SQControl after installing the SQControl OPC Server, 
you must reboot the computer in order for the OPC server module to recognize these changes.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
192
Working with SQControl OPC Server 
The SQControl OPC Server is different than a stand-alone program. Since the program is not 
intended to operate independently, there aren’t many operation details. In this section, however, 
we will explain how this program is installed, how to view and change the status of the SQControl 
OPC Server service, and which tags are supported. We will also describe how to change a tag 
from an OPC client. 
SQControl OPC Server as a Service 
When you install the SQControl software (version 2.8.0.3 and later), the SQControl OPC Server will 
be installed automatically. SQControl OPC Server, installed as a Microsoft® Windows® system 
service, communicates with SQControl to provide a means for external systems such as DCS or 
plant historian systems to monitor the data generated by the B&W SQ-300i and NWL PowerPlus™ 
controls and, to a limited extent, manage the operation of the controls, such as running/halting a 
control. 
 
The SQControl OPC Server service is installed with a manual start type, meaning that the program 
will open any time you try to connect to it using an external OPC client. (If you have no need for the 
SQControl OPC Server, it will never open or consume computer resources.) However, you may 
also enable and disable SQControl OPC Server via the Services applet under Administrative Tools 
in Control Panel (requires being logged in as an Administrator). When enabled, the OPC Server 
can be running even when SQControl itself is not; when this is the case, all of the control-specific 
tags will display a Bad quality value and the server-level STATUS tag will indicate No Response. 
 
To check the status of SQControl OPC Server 
• On the Windows® taskbar, click Start. 
• Point to the Services shortcut (if available), or to Control Panel , then Administrative Tools , 
and then Services . 
• If you receive a security warning, click Yes to open the Services window. 
• In the Local Services list, look for the SQControl OPC Server. The Status column will tell you if 
the service is Started or blank (Stopped). 
 
To change the status of SQControl OPC Server 
• Once you access the Local Services list (above), right-click on the SQControl OPC Server 
listing. 
• Select Start to run the service or Stop to shut down the service.© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
193
SQControl Tags 
SQControl OPC Server supports a set of SQControl tags that you can subscribe to with an external 
OPC client (like a DCS). So for each SQ-300i Hybrid or NWL PowerPlus™ control you have 
configured in SQControl, there is a pre-defined list of data points that can be made available to 
other systems. (You have the ability to select which data points will be available to external clients 
using the B&W OPC Browser.) 
 
Each of the pre-defined data points is called a tag. Each two-part tag name consists of a control 
name and a data element name. For example, the tag SQControl.1A1.SPARK_RATE returns the 
Spark Rate value for the SQ-300i Hybrid Control or NWL PowerPlus™ control named 1A1. 
 
Tag values may be writeable or readable. 
• Values for writeable SQControl tags are sent from an external OPC client to the SQControl 
OPC Server to the SQ-300i Hybrid or NWL PowerPlus™ control. These data element names 
begin with SET. The values are user-provided at the OPC client. 
• Values for readable tags are sent from the SQControl OPC Server to an external OPC client. 
These values are system-generated. In accordance with the OPC Data Access specification, 
the OPC server also returns the quality of the value and a timestamp to the OPC client. 
 
The OPC server supports the following writeable tags for the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
OPC Server Writeable Tags (SQControl) 
Data Element Name Description User-Provided Value 
SET_RUN_HALT Run/halt the control 
1=Halt, 2=Run, 
Status returns to 0 after 
halt or run command 
SET_EM_LIMIT Set Energy Management limit 0-100, EM must be on 
SET_KW_LIMIT Set KW limit KW for limit or 0=Disable 
SET_FANGLE_LIMIT Set firing angle limit 
SET_PRIVOLT_LIMIT Set primary voltage limit 
SET_SECCUR_LIMIT Set secondary current limit 
SET_SECKVPEAK_LIMIT Set peak KV limit 
SET_SECKVAVG_LIMIT Set average KV limit 
SET_RAPPER_1_ON_OFF Turn on/off rapper output 1 1=Turn on, 0=Turn off 
SET_RAPPER_2_ON_OFF Turn on/off rapper output 2 1=Turn on, 0=Turn off 
SET_RAPPER_3_ON_OFF Turn on/off rapper output 3 1=Turn on, 0=Turn off 
SET_RAPPER_4_ON_OFF Turn on/off rapper output 4 1=Turn on, 0=Turn off 
SET_POR_ON_OFF Turn on/off Power Off Rapping 1=On, 0=Off 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
194
The OPC server supports the following writeable tags for the NWL PowerPlus™ control. 
OPC Server Writeable Tags (SQControl) 
Data Element Name Description User-Provided Value 
SET_RUN_HALT Run/halt the control 
1=Halt, 2=Run, 
Status returns to 0 after 
halt or run command 
SET_CTRL_MODE Sets one of four control modes 
1=Set Point, 2=Manual, 
3=AutoTune, 
4=AutoSelect 
SET_DUTY_CYCLE Sets duty cycle 0-100 (in manual mode), 
50-100 (in set point mode) 
SET_MAX_DUTY_CYCLE Sets maximum duty cycle 
0-100 (in manual mode), 
50-100 (in set point mode) 
SET_POR_ON_OFF Turn on/off Power Off Rapping 1=On, 0=Off 
 
 
The OPC server supports the following readable server status tags. 
OPC Server Readable Tags (SQControl) 
Data Element Name Description System-Provided Value 
Running Status of the server T=running, F=not running 
Heartbeat Status of the server (alternate) 
Increments 
0-300=running, Steady 
value=not running 
ServerStarted Last time server was started 
ServerTime Time (for timestamps) 
IPAddress 
IP address of the computer running 
SQControl 
 
Status 
Status of SQControl relative to the 
server 
OK=communicating, 
No Response=no 
communication, 
Error=internal server error 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
195
The OPC server supports the following readable tags for the SQ-300i Hybrid. 
OPC Server Readable Tags (SQControl) 
Data Element Name Description System-Provided 
Value 
AvcName Control name 
IPAddress IP address of control 
AvcType Control type (See Cntrol Type table) 
Plate Area Plate area (per control config) 
Plate Spacing Plate spacing (per control config) 
STATUS Status of the control (See SQ Status table) 
PRI_CURRENT Primary current (amps) 
PRI_VOLTAGE Primary voltage (volts) 
SEC_CURRENT Secondary current (milliamps) 
SEC_AVG_KV Secondary average voltage (KV) 
SEC_MIN_KV Secondary minimum voltage (KV) 
SEC_MAX_KV Secondary maximum voltage (KV) 
INPUT_PWR Sum of all input power readings (KVA) 
OUTPUT_PWR Output power (KW) 
FIRING_ANGLE Firing angle (degrees) 
SPARK_RATE Spark rate (sparks per minute) 
WAVEFORM_DISTORTION 
% of secondary current lost due to shape of 
secondary waveform 
 
FRACTIONAL_COND Fractional conduction 
PEAK_TO_AVG_KV_RATIO Peak to average sec voltage ratio 
AVG_TO MIN_KV RATIO Average to min sec voltage ratio 
BCSEARCH_STATE Back corona search status 
0=No search, 1=Allow 
search, 2=Active 
search 
BCSEARCH_MINUTES Minutes left until BC search Minutes 
BCSEARCH_PBRATIO Back corona search pulse blocking ratio Full cycles 
BCSEARCH_FANGLE Back corona search firing angle 0.1 degrees 
BCSEARCH_LIMIT Back corona search limit 1=Limit 
EM_LIMIT Energy Management (EM) limit 0-100 
PB_FULLCYCLESOFF Pulse blocking full cycles off Full cycles off 
CURRENT_DENSITY Current density 
FIELD_STRENGTH Field strength 
MIGRATION_VELOCITY Migration velocity 
COV_VOLT Last corona onset voltage reading 
0 if option is turned off 
or no previous reading 
AVG_LINE_HZ Average line frequency (Hertz) 
MIN_LINE_HZ Minimum line frequency (Hertz) 
MAX_LINE_HZ Maximum line frequency (Hertz) 
LINE_VOLTS_AVG Line voltage average(volts) 
LINE_VOLTS_RMS Line voltage RMS (volts) 
RAPPER_STATUS Status of rapper outputs Bitmask for 4 outputs 
RAPPER_FEEDBACK Feedback from rapper outputs Bitmask for 4 outputs 
HEATER_STATUS Status of heater outputs Bitmask for 4 outputs 
HEATER_FEEDBACK Feedback from heater outputs Bitmask for 4 outputs 
HORN_STATUS Status of horn outputs Bitmask for 4 outputs 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
196
SQ Status Table 
Status 
Value 
Definition Status 
Value 
Definition 
0 Normal 18 SCR Over Temperature Alarm 
1 Lost Connection 19 TR Over Temperature Alarm 
2 Paused 20 TR Vacuum Pressure Alarm 
3 Port Closed 21 Emergency Stop 
4 Illegal Port 22 TR Low Oil Alarm 
5 Invalid Response 23 Cubical Over Temperature Alarm 
10 Primary Overcurrent Alarm 24 Boiler Trip Alarm 
11 Primary Undervoltage Alarm 25 Hopper High Alarm 
12 Secondary Overcurrent Alarm 26 Unknown Alarm 
13 Secondary Undervoltage Alarm 30 Power Off 
14 Imbalance Alarm 31 Enable Open 
15 Data Error Alarm 32 No Response 
16 Secondary Undervoltage Alarm KV2 33 Halted 
17 Secondary Undervoltage Alarm KV1 
Note: Status values 18 through 25 are only available if the following conditions are true: (1) an external I/O module is 
connected to the SQ-300i, and (2) the associated parameter has been assigned as a digital input for that control. 
 
Control Type Table 
Status 
Value 
Definition 
1 Legacy, conventional single-phase SQ-300i 
2 Legacy, 3-phase SQ-300i 
3 Legacy, 750V primary SQ-300i 
4 Hybrid, 3-phase SQ-300i 
5 Hybrid, conventional single-phase SQ-300i 
11 NWL control 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
197
The OPC server supports the following readable tags for the NWL PowerPlus™ control. 
 
OPC Server Readable Tags (SQControl) 
Data Element Name Description System-Provided 
Value 
AvcName Control name 
IPAddress IP address of control 
AvcType Control type 
(See Control Type 
table) 
PlateArea Plate area (per control config) 
PlateSpacing Plate spacing (per control config) 
STATUS Status of the control (See NWL Status table) 
LINE_CURRENT Incoming line current(amps) 
LINE_VOLTAGE Incoming line voltage (volts) 
BUS_CURRENT Bus current (amps) 
BUS_VOLTAGE Bus voltage (volts) 
SEC_CURRENT Secondary current (amps) 
SEC_AVG_KV Secondary average voltage (KV) 
SEC_MAX_KV Secondary maximum voltage (KV) 
SEC_PRODUCT KVaverage x KVpeak 0-9999 
INPUT_PWR Input power (KVA) 
OUTPUT_PWR Output power (KW) 
DUTY_CYCLE Duty cycle 0-100% 
SPARK_RATE Spark rate (sparks per minute) 
ARC_RATE Arc rate (arcs per minute) 
FAN_AMPS Fan current (amps) 
HEATSINK_TEMP Heatsink temperature 
Note: The system may or may not provide meaningful data for the FAN_AMPS and the HEATSINK_TEMP tags (depending 
on what is installed). 
 
NWL Status Table 
Status 
Value 
Definition Status 
Value 
Definition 
0 Normal 6 Bad Device or Driver Error 
1 Lost Connection / No Response 7 Retry 
2 Paused 8 Not Available 
3 Port Closed 9 Alarm 
4 Illegal Port 31 Remote Disabled 
5 Invalid Response 33 Contactor Open 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
198
Working with the B&W OPC Browser 
You may use the B&W OPC Browser as a viewer on a remote client machine to monitor and edit 
tag activity. You may also be able to see other OPC servers that are installed on the same 
computer as the SQControl OPC Server. 
 
To start the B&W OPC Browser 
• On the Windows® taskbar, click Start . 
o Click Programs or All Programs , then click BW PGG, then click OPC Server , 
and then click OPC Browser . The B&W Browser main screen will appear. 
 
Working With the Main Screen 
 
Server list 
 
 
All of the connected OPC servers are listed at the left of the window. 
• Double-click on any server to view all of the selected tags associated 
with that server. 
• The B&W SQControl OPC Server has a sub-element called Group0. 
Double-click on this group to access the Select Tags dialog. 
(SQControl OPC Server only has one group.) 
• Server information will appear in the bottom-left corner of the screen 
for the selected server. 
This list includes 
all of the 
SQControl tags 
that you have 
elected to monitor 
These are all of 
the available OPC 
servers 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
199
Working With the Main Screen 
 
Tag list 
 
 
All of the selected OPC tags are listed at the right of the window. 
• By right-clicking on any of the selected tags, you can: 
o Remove the tag from the list of tags you will monitor 
o Write a value to the tag 
o Check tag properties 
o Set the timestamp type 
 
To write a new value to a tag from the browser 
• Right-click on one of the read/write tags. 
• Select Write Value . 
• Enter a new value and press OK. (Refer to the SQControl Tags section for information on valid 
values for each tag.) 
 
To select tags for display in the browser 
• Double-click on Group0 listed under B&W SQControl OPC Server. The Select Tags dialog will 
appear. You will use the left side of the dialog to select tags. 
 
 
 
 
This side of the dialog lists 
all of the pre-defined tags 
for SQControl software 
and the controls that are 
currently configured. 
These are the tags 
that you have 
selected to monitor 
with the browser. 
Any item with an 
arrow next to it 
can be 
expanded by 
double-clicking 
it. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
200
• To add a single tag: 
o Double-click on the tag. It will appear in the Selected Tags list on the right. 
o Right-click on a tag and select Add Selected . 
• To add multiple tags: 
o Press the Add All button. This will add all of the pre-defined tags for the system 
and for all of the configured controls. 
o Right-click on SQControl (the top-most entry) and select Add All Below This 
Level . This will add all of the pre-defined tags for the system and for all of the 
configured controls. 
o Right-click on any control name and select Add All Below This Level . This will 
add all of the pre-defined tags for that control. 
• Once you have selected all of the tags that you want, press the OK button. You will return to 
the main browser window. 
 
To remove tags from the browser display 
• If you are in the Select Tags dialog, right-click on any of the tags in the Selected Tags list (on 
the right). Select Remove Selected . 
• If you are in the main browser window, right-click on any of the tags displayed under the 
SQControl.OPCServer.1 tab and select Remove Selected . 
To view tag properties 
• If you are in the Select Tags dialog, right-click on any of the tags in the Selected Tags list (on 
the right). Select Properties . 
• If you are in the main browser window, right-click on any of the tags displayed under the 
SQControl.OPCServer.1 tab and select Properties . 
 
How to work with the selected tag list 
• Select File/Save Config from the menu on the browser’s main screen. The browser will save 
your selected tags list. 
• Select File/Load Config from the menu on the browser’s main screen. The browser will open 
a previously saved selected tags list. 
• Select File/Forget Config from the menu on the browser’s main screen. The browser will 
delete your selected tags list. 
• Select Options/Load Last Config at Startup from the menu on the browser’s main screen. 
When this is selected, each time you open the browser, it will display the last tag list that you 
used (as long as it was saved). 
To close the B&W OPC Browser 
• Select File/Exit from the menu on the browser’s main screen or click on the “X” in the top-right 
corner. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
201
Working with Your OPC Client 
An external OPC client system may be used to view readable tags and change writable tags. 
(Revised tag data is sent back to the SQControl OPC server and then to SQControl and the 
associated control.) While these functions are beyond the scope of our product, we can provide 
some general instructions. Please refer to your OPC client vendor documentation for specific 
instructions. 
 
To view a tag using the OPC client 
• Go to your OPC client application. 
• Open the tag viewer or tag list. 
• Select the tag you want, and review all of the information available for that tag. 
 
To change a tag using the OPC client 
• Go to your OPC client application. 
• Open the tag viewer or tag list. 
• Select the tag you would like to change. 
• Select the VALUE you would like to change and enter a new value. (Refer to the SQControl 
Tags section for information on valid values for each tag.) 
• Enter or apply this new information. 
You should be able to view the result of the change in SQControl. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
202
SQProgram Software 
Introduction 
The SQProgram software is a utility that ships with SQControl. This program is used to load an 
updated version of firmware to the SQ-300i Hybrid Single-Phase microcontroller. Updating the 
firmware may be necessary if a major problem is discovered, or if you decide to purchase an 
upgrade, but this is not a routine activity. 
 
If a firmware update becomes necessary, the update will likely happen in one of two ways: 
 
• An on-site B&W technician will use the SQProgram software to update the firmware 
• B&W will send you the firmware via thumb drive, email, or web site, and you will use 
SQProgram to update the controls 
 
 
Working with SQProgram 
SQProgram may be used to perform a firmware update from a computer or the optional Operator 
Interface as long as it is connected to the control network. If you have the SQControl software 
installed on either device, the SQProgram software is already installed.(If you have a stand-alone 
control and you need to install SQControl on a laptop, please refer to the installation section.) 
 
To start SQProgram on the Operator Interface 
• If SQControl is running, you will need to shut it down. 
o From the SQ-300i Options screen, press or click the System Settings button, then 
the Shutdown button, and then Exit to Windows . 
• On the desktop, double-click on My Computer , or from the Start menu, point to My Computer . 
• Go to the following folder: C:\Program Files\BW PGG\SQControl. 
• Double-click on the SQProgram.exe file. 
 
To start SQProgram on a laptop or pc 
• On the Windows® taskbar, press or click Start . 
• Press or click Programs or All Programs , and then BW PGG. 
• Press or click SQProgram . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
203
 
 
This is the main screen for 
the SQProgram software. 
From here, you can search 
for the SQ-300i Hybrid 
Single-Phase controls on 
the network, change the IP 
address for a control, and 
update firmware for a 
control. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
To search for SQ-300 i controls 
• Press or click the SQ-300i control type check box. 
• Press or click the Locate controls on the network check box. 
• Enter the IP address range that you want to search. 
• Press or click the Search button. 
 
 
 
 
To work with SQ-300i 
Hybrid Single-Phase 
controls, select the 
SQ-300i control type 
Select the action you 
want to perform 
The Test function is 
used just to test the 
network 
You may need to 
change the Search 
Type if your SQ-300i 
controls are addressed 
in different ranges. 
 
The Query Only search 
type uses UDP 
protocol which will 
search across IP 
address ranges. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
204
Results of the search will 
appear within the main screen. 
For each SQ-300i found, the 
system will provide the IP 
address, the control name, the 
control type, and the firmware 
version. 
 
This information may help you 
determine which controls need 
to be re-addressed or updated. 
 
• Press or click the Back 
button to return to the main 
screen. 
 
 
 
 
To change the IP address for 
an SQ-300i control 
• At the main screen, press or 
click Change a control’s IP 
Address check box. 
• Enter the control’s current IP 
address, then press the 
Next button. The Program 
Control IP Address screen 
will appear. 
• Enter the new IP address in 
the field provided, then 
press the Update button. 
• You will receive a message 
to indicate the status of the 
change. 
• 
• Press or click the Back 
button to return to the main 
screen. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
205
To update the firmware on an SQ-300 i control 
• Press or click the SQ-300i control type check box. 
• Press or click the Program a specific control check box. 
• Enter the IP address of the 
control that you want to 
update. 
• Press or click the Next 
button. The Program 
SQ-300i Firmware screen 
will appear. 
• Press or click the Browse 
button to find the new 
firmware file (a .BIN file). 
Select the file and press or 
click Open . 
• Press or click the Validate 
button. The software will 
run a quick check of the 
control and the file. Details 
of this check will appear in 
the lower half of the screen. 
• If the file is valid, you may 
press or click the Process 
button to update the control. 
• You will receive a message 
to indicate the status of the 
update. 
• Press or click the Back 
button to return to the main 
screen. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
To close the SQProgram software 
• Press or click the Close button. 
 
 
Browse 
button 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
206
Specifications 
SQ-300i Hybrid Controller: 
Dimensions .................................... 8” x 9-1/4” x 1-7/8” (203.2 mm x 234.95 mm x 47.625 mm) 
Weight .................................................................................................................. 2.5 lb. (1.2 kg) 
Input Voltage .......................................................................................................... 120-240 VAC 
Input Frequency ............................................................................................................ 47-63 Hz 
Input Current .................................................. 0.40 Amps @ 240 VAC / 0.80 Amps @ 120 VAC 
Required Overcurrent Protection ................................................................... 10 Amps Max. AC 
 
 
Transient Filter Board: 
Dimensions ............................................................... 1.75 in. x 3.25 in. (44.45 mm x 82.55 mm) 
Weight .............................................................................................................. 0.13 lb. (0.06 kg) 
Input Voltage Range ...................................................................................................... 0-5 VDC 
Input Frequency ..................................................................................................................... DC 
Input Current 
J1-1 ............................................................................................................................ 320 uA 
J1-2 ............................................................................................................................ 320 uA 
J1-3 ............................................................................................................................ 370 uA 
Maximum Current 
J1-1 ............................................................................................................................ 960 uA 
J1-2 ............................................................................................................................ 960 uA 
J1-3 .......................................................................................................................... 1.11 mA 
 
 
General: 
Operating Temperature Maximum ......................................................................... 104°F (40°C) 
Operating Humidity Maximum ..................................... 90% Relative Humidity, non-condensing 
Operating Altitude Range ........................................................................... 0-9842 ft. (0-3000 m) 
Storage Temperature Range ..................................................... -68°F to 122°F (-20°C to 50°C) 
Storage Humidity Range ........................................ 20-50% Relative Humidity, non-condensing 
Storage Altitude Range .............................................................................. 0-9842 ft. (0-3000 m) 
 
 
Operator Interface (Optional): 
Dimensions ................................................... 12.9” x 10.3” x 2.1” (328 mm x 262 mm x 52 mm) 
Weight .............................................................................................................. 5.46 lb. (2.48 kg) 
Operation Temperature ................................................................... 32°F to 113° F (0°C to 45°C) 
Relative Humidity (Operation or Storage) .......................10% to 90% @ 40°C, non-condensing 
Vibration ......................................................................... 5 to 500 Hz, 2.0 G random for CF card 
Power Input ............................................................. 10~30 V DC with phoenix power connector 
Outer Bezel Dimensions ........................ 13.9” x 11.4” x 0.0625” (353 mm x 290 mm x 1.6 mm) 
Outer Bezel Weight ......................................................................................... 0.23 lbs. (0.10 kg) 
Inner Bezel Dimensions ........................... 13.9” x 11.4” x 0.125” (353 mm x 290 mm x 3.2 mm)Inner Bezel Weight .......................................................................................... 0.46 lbs. (0.21 kg) 
Optional Power Supply: 
Input Voltage (Selectable) ...................................................... 100-120 VAC / 200-240 VAC 
Input Current .............................................................................................. 3 Amps / 2 Amps 
Input Frequency .................................................................................................. 50 or 60 Hz 
Output Voltage .................................................................................. 24 VDC (22 – 30 VDC) 
Output Current .......................................................................................................... 5 Amps 
Power Consumption .................................................................................. Approx. 59 Watts 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
207
 
Auxiliary Display (Optional): 
Dimensions ................................................. 5.04” x 4.02” x 1.50” (128 mm x 102 mm x 38 mm) 
Weight .................................................................................................................. 0.7 lb. (0.3 kg) 
Operating Temperature ............................................................................ 32 ~ 122°F (0 ~ 50°C) 
Relative Humidity ............................................................ 10 to 90% rH@40°C, non- condensing 
Shock ........................................................................ 10 to 25 Hz (X, Y, Z direction 2G, 30 min) 
Power Requirements ........................................................................ 24 VDC, 250 mA maximum 
Nominal Input Voltage ............................................................................................ 100-240 VAC 
Nominal Input Current ...................................................... 1.1 A @ 115 VAC, 0.7 A @ 230 VAC 
Input Frequency ............................................................................. 47-63 Hz (0 Hz @ DC input) 
Nominal Output Voltage / Adjustment Range ....................... 24 VDC ±2% / 22-28 VDC (≤60W) 
Nominal Output Current ............................................................................................... 2.5 Amps 
Output Power ................................................................................................................ 60 Watts 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
208
Appendices 
Notes & Acknowledgements 
All sales of B&W's products or services are subject to B&W's standard terms and conditions. Those 
terms and conditions provide our customers with certain express warranties for our products and 
services. Nothing in this booklet should be considered an express or implied warranty. B&W's 
products, designs and specifications are subject to change without notice. 
 
§ Each Microsoft® operating system defines a directory in which program data will be stored. The 
standard locations are listed below. Depending on your system configuration, the directory trees 
referred to in this manual may reside on some other drive. 
 
For Microsoft® Windows® 7 operating systems: 
 
(SQControl) C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\BW PGG 
(Precipitator Manager) C:\Program Data\Babcock & Wilcox\B&W Precipitator 
 
SQ-300 and JuiceCan are trademarks of The Babcock & Wilcox Company. 
 
All other trademarks referenced herein are property of their respective owners. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company All rights reserved. 
 
 
 Product Recognition and Declaration of Conformity 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
UL 61010-1 
CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 
E112836 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
209
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
210
Default Settings 
The Set SQ Parameters button allows access to the Configuration Group which enables you to set 
the SQ-300i Hybrid parameters. The following groups are configured by accessing the Set SQ 
Parameters section: Operating Limits, Alarm Limits, Spark Response, TR Set Sizing, Scaling 
Settings and Communication Settings. 
 
Each unit is shipped with default/safe settings installed which will prevent system operation. After 
installation, many settings must be changed based on the customers individual TR set. 
 
Please refer to the Programming the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller section of this manual for detailed 
information on each parameter. The following is a list of all parameters, the range and the 
default/safe setting for each. (This list also includes the default security passwords. Please refer to 
the Security section of the manual for more information about these passwords.) 
 
 Single -Phase 
Operating Limits Value Range Default/Safe 
Setting 
Primary Current Limit Varies 0 
Primary Voltage Limit 0 – 800 0 
Secondary Current Limit Varies 0 
Secondary Average KV Limit Varies 0 
Secondary Peak KV Limit Varies 0 
Secondary Voltage Limit Type Average, Peak, 
or Both 
Average 
SCR Firing Angle Limit 16 - 180 35 
Juice Can Installed Yes or No No 
Min. Pri. Current Allowed in 
Manual Mode 
0 – 200 0 
Conduction Limit 60-100 86 
Alarm Limits 
Primary Over Current Alm Varies 0 
Primary Under Voltage Alm 0 - 700 0 
Secondary Over Current Alm 0 - 9000 0 
Secondary Under Voltage Alm 0 – 200 0 
Under Volt Alm Time Delay 1-99 30 
Imbalance Alm Off or On On 
Alarm Contact Type Norm Open / 
Norm Closed 
Normally Open 
Hz Mismatch Alarm Off or On On 
TR Set 
TR Set Pri Voltage Rating 0 – 800 0 
TR Set Pri Current Rating 0 – 900 0 
TR Set Sec Current Rating 0 – 9000 0 
TR Set Sec Avg KV Rating 0 – 150 0 
TR Set Sec Peak KV Rating 0 – 300 0 
TR Set Form Factor Rating 1.20 – 3.00 1.2 
Min Secondary Current for 
Remote Limits 
0 – 9000 200 
Line Voltage Rating 0 – 600 600 
Hz Rating 50 or 60 60 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
211
 
 Single -Phase 
Spark Response Value Range Default/Safe 
Spark Rate 1–30 w/Juice 
Can, 1–99 w/o 
JuiceCan 
 
30 
Spark Sensitivity 0 - 9 3 
Spark Quench 1 - 9 1 
Arc Quench 1 - 9 3 
Fast Ramp Time 1 - 9 6 
Spark Set Back 1 – 99 25 
Spark Reaction Quench or Spit Quench 
Spit Spark Set Back 1 – 99 25 
Spark Mode KV or mA mA 
OverSpark Alarm Off or On Off 
OverSpark Alarm Limit 1 – 99 99 
Recovery Ramp Delay 0 - 9 5 
Smart Spark Off or On Off 
Back Corona 
BC Search Time Interval 0 – 1440 0 
BC Starting Pulse Ratio 0 – 100 0 
BC Ending Pulse Ratio 0 – 100 1 
BC Minimum Sec Current 0 – 9999 25 
BC Starting Sec Current 0 – 9999 25 
Pulse Blocking 
PB SCR Firing Angle Limit in 
Pulse Blocking Mode 
16 – 180 90 
PB Full Cyc @ Reduced Level 0 – 100 0 
PB Reduced Power Level 0 – 100 0 
Scaling Settings 
Secondary Voltage Feedback Yes or No Yes 
Primary Current Scale 10 - 900 100 
Secondary Current Scale 10 - 9000 1000 
Secondary Voltage Scale 60 - 150 80 
Primary Voltage Input Source SCR Output or 
TR Set Input 
SCR Output 
Security 
User Password Varies User 
Administrator Password Varies Superuser 
Communication 
IP Address 
Set by 
Customer’s 
Network 
Administrator 
192.168.1.2 
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 
Control Name SQi-XXXX 
(XXXX = Last 4 
digits of MAC) 
Expansion I/O Type Beckhoff, 
B&W, Adam 
Beckhoff 
Aux. Display Type None, Maple None 
Power Restore Run/Halt State Last Known 
Good State, 
Haled 
Last Known 
Good State 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
212
Using the Reset Feature 
If the SQ-300i Hybrid is unable to recover from an error condition, or if the control profile becomes 
corrupt, there are a coupleof options for restoring operation. Both of these options will reset all of 
the configuration options (including TR set parameters) to defaults, as well as the IP address, 
subnet mask, and the control name. 
 
 
Use the Reset features with caution . Once you reset, you may initially 
lose communication with the control. You will need to find the control 
again, then re-program the IP address and subnet mask, then re-enter all 
of the SQ-300i Hybrid control settings. 
Utilisez les fonctions de réinitialisation avec prudence. Une fois que vous 
réinitialisez, vous risquez, au départ, de perdre la communication avec le 
contrôleur. Vous aurez besoin de rechercher à nouveau le contrôleur, 
reprogrammer l'adresse IP et le masque sous-réseau, puis ré-entrer tous 
les paramètres du contrôleur SQ-300i. 
Use la opción de re-ajuste con mucho cuidado. Una vez que se re-ajusta 
Ud. puede perder la comunicación con el control. Si esto sucede Ud. 
Tiene que reprogramar la dirección IP y la “sub-net mask” del control 
usando el programa SQDiscover. Luego ponga nuevamente los ajustes 
del SQ-300i. 
 
 
Reset Using SQDiscover 
The easiest and safest way to reset the control is to use SQDiscover. The SQDiscover software 
may already be installed on your system. Please refer to the SQDiscover manual and the Reset 
Control to Factory Defaults section for more details. 
 
 
Reset Using the Reset Button 
If there is no way to reset the control using SQDiscover, the Reset button on the SQ-300i Hybrid 
Controller may be used. 
 
 
 • WARNING – RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. 
AVERTISSEMENT - RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION. 
ADVERTENCIA – RIESGO DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO. 
• Only qualified electricians or electrical instrumen t technicians 
should perform the reset function using the Reset b utton. 
Seul un électricien qualifié ou des techniciens spécialisés dans les 
instruments électriques peuvent exécuter la fonction de réinitialisation 
à l'aide de la touche Reset. 
Solamente electricistas o Instrumentistas calificados deben ejecutar 
la función de re-ajuste. El re-ajuste se hace a travez del botón de 
re-ajuste. 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
213
 
 
 • Follow your plant's safety rules and regulations an d take 
appropriate electrical safety precautions when perf orming this 
reset. 
Suivez les consignes de sécurité et les règlements de votre 
établissement et respectez les précautions appropriées relatives à la 
sécurité électrique lorsque vous effectuez cette réinitialisation. 
Cuando ejecuta el re-ajuste del control siga las regulationes de 
seguridad de la planta y también las seguridades/precauciones 
eléctricas del caso. 
 
 
 
 
• Remove and lock out power to the SQ-300i Hybrid AVC cabinet. 
• Remove the SQ-300i Hybrid Controller unit. 
• Remove the cover from the Controller. 
• Temporarily wire and apply 120 or 240 VAC to the Controller. 
o J1-1 (Control Power-Ground) 
o J1-2 (Control Power-Neutral) 
o J1-3 (Control Power-Hot) 
• When the green LED illuminates, press and hold the reset button for 3 to 5 seconds. 
• Remove power and remove the temporary wires. 
• Reattach the cover, then reinstall the Controller in the AVC cabinet. 
• Close and secure the AVC cabinet, then reapply power to the cabinet. 
• Once the control powers back up, you must enter all of your control settings again. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Reset button 
J1 
Green LED 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
214
 
Service 
If you need product support, additional parts, or service, please contact Babcock & Wilcox using 
any of the following: 
 
Toll-Free in the U.S.: 1-800-354-4400 
 1-800-336-2585 
 
 
 
Fax: 330-860-9350 
 
 
Email: tsr@babcock.com 
 preciptech@babcock.com 
 
On the web: www.babcock.com 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
215
 
Quick Tips 
To Add an SQ-300 i to the System… 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1. At the Options screen, 
press the red HALT 
button to clear the alarm. 
2. Press the green RUN 
button to restart. 
(If you see a Main Power Off 
message, you need to engage 
the main contactor. Press the 
green Start button on the front 
of the cabinet, then press 
RUN.) 
1. To access the Manage Controls 
screen: 
• From any of the Operate screens, 
press the Functions button. 
• From the Options screen, press 
System Settings . 
• From the System Settings 
screen, press Manage Controls . 
2. At the Manage Controls screen, press 
the Add button. 
3. Select the Control Type from the 
drop-down list. 
4. Enter the IP Address of the 
control and press Verify . If the 
IP address is verified, press OK 
to add the control to the list. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
216
 
To Run or Halt an AVC Using SQControl… 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
To Clear an Alarm Using SQControl… 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1. At the Options screen, 
press the red HALT 
button to clear the alarm. 
2. Press the green RUN 
button to restart. 
(If you see a Main Power Off 
message, you need to engage 
the main contactor. Press the 
green Start button on the front 
of the cabinet, then press 
RUN.) 
1. To access the Options 
screen: 
From any of the Operate 
screens, press the 
Functions button 
OR, from the System 
Settings screen, press 
Control Settings . 
2. When the Options screen 
appears, press the green 
RUN button or the red HALT 
button. 
(If you see a Main Power Off 
message, you need to engage 
the main contactor. Press the 
green Start button on the front 
of the cabinet, then press RUN.) 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
217
 
To Clear an Alarm Using the Aux Display… 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
To Assign a New Control Name or Address… 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1. Open the SQDiscover utility. (Can’t find 
it? It should be in the Program Files/BW 
PGG/Utilities folder.) 
SQDiscover will immediately display all 
of the controls it finds on the network. 
2. Right-click on the row that represents the 
control you want to change. 
3. Select Re-program IP Address/Subnet 
Mask or Change Control Name . 
4. Enter new information, as needed, and 
press OK to save. 
1. At any available screen, 
press the red HALT 
button to clear the alarm. 
2. Press the green RUN 
button to restart. 
(If you see a Main Power Off 
message, you need to engage 
the main contactor. Press the 
green Start button on the front 
of the cabinet, then press 
RUN.) 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
218
 
To Update Firmware on One or More AVCs… 
 
6. Use the check boxes, All , 
and None buttons to 
select one or more SQs 
for the update. 
7. Press Browse to find and 
select the firmware file. 
8. Press Validate to run 
a check on the 
firmware file. 
9. If the file is valid, 
press the Process 
button to run the 
update on the 
selected SQs. 
1. Open the SQProgram utility. (Can’t find it? It should 
be in the Program Files/BW PGG/Utilities folder.) 
2. Select the SQ-300i control type. 
3. Select Locate controls on the network and enter the IP 
address range that you want to search. 
4. Press the Search button. 
5. When the search is done, press the Next button. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19219
 
Repairs 
If your product needs repair, please follow the instructions below. 
 
 
 
 
• WARNING – Follow safety instructions and disconnect all power 
before removing or servicing the control! 
AVERTISSEMENT – Suivez les consignes de sécurité et coupez 
l'alimentation avant d'enlever ou d'intervenir sur le contrôleur ! 
ADVERTENCIA- ¡Antes de quitar o reparar el control , siga las 
instrucciones de seguridad y desconecte la energía ! 
 
• Contact your B&W representative for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and 
instructions. 
• Clean any loose dirt and dust from the inside and the outside of the control before packaging. 
• Package the product securely. Use the original packaging and anti-static bags whenever 
possible. Fill empty spaces with packing material to help minimize shifting during shipment. 
• Please include a brief description of the problem. 
• Label the outside of the package with the RMA number for quicker processing. 
• Unless otherwise directed by your B&W representative, send your package back to the 
manufacturing site at the following address: 
 
B&W 
11864 Canon Blvd. 
Suite 105 
Newport News, VA 23606-4223 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
220
 
 
License Conditions 
The Babcock & Wilcox Company (B&W) supplies you with software and permits you to use this 
software according to the conditions of the license. 
 
You may: 
 
• use the program on a single computer or network and it may only be used by one person at 
present. 
• make a back up copy of the program. 
• transfer the usage of the program to another person only when you renounce all rights 
under the license, do not make further use of the program and delete all copies of the 
program. 
 
You may not: 
 
• copy or use the program in a manner not permitted by this license. 
• rent, loan or transfer the program to a third party except under the conditions specified 
above. 
• change the program or incorporate the program partially or totally in other programs. 
 
Duration: 
 
This license is valid for the total time for which you use this program. The license is invalid when 
you fail to abide by the conditions of the license. The guarantee and liability conditions below 
remain valid even when you fail to abide by the conditions of the license. 
 
Guarantee: 
 
We guarantee that the software is free from material and service defects for 90 days after the date 
of delivery. 
 
Guarantee and Liability Conditions: 
 
The program is supplied on the basis of its present state. Apart from the guarantee given above 
there are no other explicit or implicit guarantees or conditions of any kind. For example, there are 
no guarantee claims in respect of the sales quality, saleability and suitability for particular purposes 
or those originating from legal requirements, regulations, business practice or trade. The total risk 
in respect of the results and performance of the program is yours. You or third parties have no 
claim against B&W for direct, indirect, accidental, consequential, particular damages or subsequent 
damages. This applies also to damages as reduced profit, lost or corrupted data or for other 
commercial or business losses. 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
221
Index 
Add 
OPC I/O, 129 
Alarm contact type, 61 
Alarm limits, 58 
Alarm List, 105 
Alarms function, 122 
Analog Inputs/Outputs, 83, 85 
Appendices, 201 
Arc quench, 64 
Aux display 
installation, 161 
installation requirements, 
161 
operation, 167 
overview, 161 
Aux Display, 161 
B&W PrecipTech Legacy OPC 
Server 
about, 183 
startup, 184 
Back corona search 
how it works, 66 
maximum full cycles off, 68 
minimum secondary 
current, 69 
search interval, 68 
starting full cycles off, 68 
starting secondary current, 
69 
Client program, 191, 194, 195 
CLR control, 12 
Communication Settings, 76 
Communications, 132, 183, 
184, 185 
Conduction limit, 57 
Conformal coating, 15 
Construction, 15 
Control Name, 78 
Default Settings, 203, 205 
Delete 
OPC I/O, 129 
Determine alarm limits, 58 
Digital inputs, 72 
comm loss alarms, 82 
Digital Inputs/Outputs, 79, 81 
Disabling alarms, 58 
Display option, 161 
Edit 
back corona search 
settings, 67 
heater/horn settings, 87, 
90, 92 
OPC I/O, 129 
pulse blocking settings, 70 
Edit alarm limits, 58 
Edit operating limits 
3-Phase, 54 
Edit rapper control settings, 73 
Edit spit spark response, 61 
Edit TR sizing screens 
3-Phase, 47 
Energy Management, 121 
Ethernet, 132, 156 
Ethernet Communication, 16 
Event Log, 131 
Expanded display, 35 
External rapping percentage 
set, 75 
External rapping type 
set, 75 
Fast ramp time, 64 
Field wiring, 14, 15 
Form factor 
optimum value, 12 
using this data, 12 
Fractional conduction 
optimum value, 12 
using this data, 12 
Function screens, 37 
Halt key, 38 
Heater off level, 88 
Heater on level, 89 
Heater/horn settings, 87, 90, 92 
Horn off period, 89 
Horn on period, 89 
Horn reduced level, 89 
Horn run time (after control halt), 
90 
How to 
change a tag using the 
client, 194 
check/change the status of 
the Legacy OPC 
Server, 185 
view a tag using the client, 
191, 192, 193, 194, 
195, 196, 197, 198 
Imbalance alarm, 60, 61 
Important notes, 183, 185 
Incoming line voltage tap, 30 
Installation 
location requirements, 29 
overview, 29 
power requirements, 30 
Installing components, 30 
IP address, 132 
IP addresses, 30 
JuiceCan (yes/no), 57 
KV Feedback Available 
3-Phase, 52 
Language selection 
on/off, 169 
License Conditions, 209 
Line frequency 
3-Phase, 50 
Line voltage, 10 
Line Voltage Rating 
3-Phase, 50 
Main display 
alarm messages, 105 
status messages, 105 
Main power off alarm, 106 
Manage Controls, 124, 128 
Manual Pot Low Limit, 57 
Memory Map, 134 
Messages 
priority, 105 
Meters 
compatibility with, 14 
Microcontroller 
inputs and outputs, 14 
Microcontroller, 13, 14 
Microcontroller 
connections, 16 
Microcontroller, 30 
Navigation, 35 
Network, 132 
Network hardware, 156 
NWL controls, 20 
readable OPC tags, 190 
writeable OPC tags, 187 
On-board scope, 19 
On-board trending, 19 
OPC tags, 186 
Operate screens, 35, 93 
Operating conditions, 183 
domain, 183 
server and client, 184 
services, 184 
Operating limits 
3-Phase, 54 
Operator Interface, 13, 15, 155 
configuration, 30, 160 
display, 36 
installation overview, 155 
IP address, 156 
location requirements, 156 
new install, 157 
overview, 155 
power requirements, 156 
replacing a larger interface, 
159 
specifications, 199 
subnet mask, 156 
wiring, 160 
Overspark alarm setting, 65 
Permissions, 184 
 
© 2016 The Babcock & Wilcox Company. All rights reserved. SQ300i_Hybrid1P Rev. C 6/19 
 
222
Primary current limit, 55 
Primary current scale 
3-Phase, 52 
Primary overcurrent alarm, 59 
Primary undervoltage alarm, 59 
Primary voltage limit, 55 
Programmable alarms, 19 
Programming 
Hybrid 3-Phase, 45 
Protection 
from electromagnetic 
interference, 13 
from elevated 
temperatures, 13 
from noise, 13 
Pulse blocking 
full cycles @ reduced 
power, 71 
how it works, 70 
reduced power, 72 
SCR firing angle limit, 71 
Rapper control (optional), 19 
Rapper halt delay 
set, 74 
Rapper output on times 
set, 74 
Real time data display, 19 
Recommended network 
components, 133 
Recovery ramp delay, 66 
Recovery ramp rate, 65 
Reduced CO input percent, 88 
Reduced CO input type, 88 
Reduced power rapp 
set, 74 
Remote Diagnostics, 15 
Remote Diagnostics service, 
133 
Remote I/O comm alarm, 82 
Remote I/O comm error, 82 
Remote monitoring, 133 
Repairs, 208 
Run key, 38 
Safety notice, 8 
Saturable core reactors 
compatibility with, 14 
Scaling Settings 
3-Phase, 51 
Scope, 113 
SCR firing angle limit, 56 
SCR firing assembly,